utopia controls

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

© Hitachi, Ltd. 2007. All rights reserved.TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Technical catalogueRemote controls

CSC-5S

Catálogo técnico

�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents

Table of contentsTechnical catalogue

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. FEATURESANDBENEFITS..................................................................13

1.1. Introduction.............................................................................................13

1.2. Remotecontrolgroups...........................................................................14

1.3. Individualremotecontrols.......................................................................15

1.4. Centralremotecontrols..........................................................................19

1.5. ComputerisedCentralRemoteControls(BMS)......................................22

2. INDIVIDUALREMOTECONTROLS.......................................................27

2.1. PC-P2HTE..............................................................................................27

2.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................27

2.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................272.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................28

2.1.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................28

2.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................29

2.1.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................292.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................292.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................302.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................302.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................312.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................32

2.1.4. Operation................................................................................................32

2.1.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................332.1.4.2.Operationmodeselectionprocedure.................................................................34

2.1.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................40

2.1.5.1.PC-P2HTEcommandfunctions..........................................................................402.1.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................412.1.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................44

2.1.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................49

2.1.6.1.Abnormaltransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandindoorunit..................492.1.6.2.Troubleshootingprocedureforunitsconnectedtotheremotecontrol................492.1.6.3.Troubleshootingoncheckmode.........................................................................512.1.6.4.Checkingprocedureforeachmaincomponent..................................................592.1.6.5.Remotecontrolself-checkingprocedure............................................................62


� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents

2.1.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................64

2.1.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................642.1.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................64

2.2. PC-P1HE................................................................................................67

2.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................67


2.2.2. Dimensiondetails...................................................................................68

2.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................69


2.2.4. Operation................................................................................................72

2.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................732.2.4.2.OperationModeSelectionProcedure................................................................74


2.2.5.1.PC-P1HEcommandfunctions............................................................................782.2.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................792.2.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................82





CSC-5S

Catálogo técnico

5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents


2.3. PC-P5H1E..............................................................................................107

2.3.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................107



2.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................108

2.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1082.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1092.3.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1092.3.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1092.3.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................110

2.3.4. Electricalconnection...............................................................................112

2.3.4.1Standardelectricalconnection...........................................................................1122.3.4.2Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1122.3.4.3.Testingprocedure...............................................................................................113

2.3.5. Operation................................................................................................115

2.3.6. OptionalFunctions..................................................................................116

2.3.7. Alarmindication......................................................................................117

2.3.8. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories......................................................119


2.4. PC-P5H..................................................................................................123

2.4.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................123



2.4.3. Installation..............................................................................................124

2.4.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1242.4.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1252.4.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1252.4.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................126


2.4.4.1.Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1272.4.4.2.Checkingprocedure...........................................................................................129


� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents

2.4.5. Operation................................................................................................130

2.4.5.1.Description........................................................................................................1302.4.5.2.Start....................................................................................................................1302.4.5.3.Stop....................................................................................................................130





2.5. WirelessRemoteControl........................................................................135


2.5.3. Installation..............................................................................................136

2.5.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................1362.5.3.2.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1372.5.3.3.Batterycharging.................................................................................................1372.5.3.4.Receiverkit.........................................................................................................1382.5.3.5.Wallinstallation...................................................................................................139

2.5.4. Operation................................................................................................139

2.5.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1402.5.4.2.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................1412.5.4.3.Operationwithseveralindoorunits....................................................................142

2.5.5. Testmodewiththeremotecontrol..........................................................145



2.5.7. PC-RLH8receiverkitinstallation............................................................147

2.5.7.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1472.5.7.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1472.5.7.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1482.5.7.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1482.5.7.5.Optionalfunctions...............................................................................................151

2.5.8 PC-RLH9receiverkitinstallation............................................................152

2.5.8.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1522.5.8.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1522.5.8.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1532.5.8.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1532.5.8.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................155

CSC-5S

Catálogo técnico

7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents


2.5.9. PC-RLH11receiverkitinstallation..........................................................156

2.5.9.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1562.5.9.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1562.5.9.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1572.5.9.4.Installationprocedure........................................................................................1572.5.9.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................160

2.5.10.PC-RLH13receiverkitinstallation...........................................................161

2.5.10.1.Safetysummary................................................................................................1612.5.10.2.Installationsiteselection...................................................................................1612.5.10.3.Supplycontent..................................................................................................1622.5.10.4.Installationprocedure.......................................................................................1622.5.10.5.Optionalfunctions.............................................................................................165

3. CENTRALREMOTECONTROLS..........................................................169

3.1. PSC-5S...................................................................................................169

3.1.1.Generaldetails...........................................................................................169



3.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................171

3.1.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1713.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1723.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1723.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1723.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1733.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................174

3.1.4. Operation................................................................................................179



3.1.5.1.Inputandoutputfunctions..................................................................................1833.1.5.2.Controlinternalfunctions....................................................................................187


3.1.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................1883.1.6.2.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................189




8 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents

3.2. CSC-5S..................................................................................................195

3.2.1. Generaldetails......................................................................................195


3.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................196


3.2.4 Operation................................................................................................202

3.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2023.2.4.2.Remotecontrols.................................................................................................2033.2.4.3.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................203



3.2.6.1.Chillerunitcheckingprocedure..........................................................................2083.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................2103.2.6.3.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................211



3.3. PSC-5T...................................................................................................217

3.3.1. GeneraldetailsSelectionadvantages....................................................217


3.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................218

3.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2183.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2193.3.3.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2203.1.3.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................2233.3.3.5.DIPswitchadjustment........................................................................................224

3.3.4. Operation................................................................................................225



CSC-5S

Catálogo técnico

�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents


4. COMPUTERISEDCENTRALREMOTECONTROLS............................233

4.1. HARC-BXE............................................................................................233

4.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................233

4.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................2334.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................2334.1.1.3.Systemconfiguration..........................................................................................234

4.1.2. Installation..............................................................................................241

4.1.2.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2414.1.2.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2414.1.2.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2424.1.2.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................242

4.1.3. Operation................................................................................................247

4.1.3.1.Testmode...........................................................................................................2474.1.3.2.BMSconnection.................................................................................................2484.1.3.3.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................248


4.1.4.1.HARC-BXEself-check......................................................................................2494.1.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2504.1.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................251

4.2. HARC-70CE1.........................................................................................255

4.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................255


4.2.2. Installation..............................................................................................262


4.2.3. Operation................................................................................................265

4.2.3.1.Checkmode.......................................................................................................2654.2.3.2.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................265


4.2.4.1.HARC-70CE1(OP)self-check.........................................................................2664.2.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2674.2.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................268


10 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

11TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits

Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue

Table of contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. FEATURES AND BENEFITS ...............................1�

1.1. Introduction .........................................................1�

1.2. Remote control groups ........................................1�

1.�. Individual remote controls ...................................15

PC-P2HTE .....................................................15

PC-P1HE .......................................................1�

PC-P5H1E (PC-ARH) ....................................17

PC-P5H ..........................................................17

PC-LH�A Wireless Remote Control ...............18

1.�. Central remote controls .......................................1�

PSC-5S ..........................................................1�

CSC-5S ..........................................................20

PSC-5T ..........................................................21

1.5. Computerised Central Remote Controls (BMS)...22

HARC-BX E ...................................................22

HARC-70CE1 .................................................22


12 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits


1. FEATURES AND BENEFITS

1.1. Introduction

• REMOTE CONTROL TYPES

- Hitachi air conditioning remote controls are divided into four types depending on the different methods of controlling both indoor and outdoor units. According to this criteria, they are divided into:

- Individual remote controls: which control each unit separately.- Central remote controls: which centralise the control of several units at one point in the office.- Building air conditioning control (CSNET WEB): not included in this technical catalogue.- Intelligent building (BMS - Building Management System): which unify the control of all the systems

installed in the building, including the air conditioning system.

��

��

��

��

��

Fig. 1 Control hierarchy

- Depending on how the system is configured, it is possible to control lower level remote controls with higher level remote controls.


1� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits

1.2. Remote control groups

Different types of remote controls will be used depending on the number of units to be controlled.

• Individual remote controls

Recommended for controlling a small number of units.

• Central remote controls

- Recommended when you want to control several units distributed throughout a whole floor of a building.- Where necessary, the central remote control can control up to two floors separately.- For such cases, the indoor units should be grouped in remote control groups with a maximum of 1� units in

each group.• CSNET WEB

- Recommended when you want to control more than two floors that need to be separately controlled.- The CSNET WEB can be installed at any point of the building. It includes a touch screen for centralised

control of the building.- The CSNET WEB system is accessible from any computer in the building which is connected to the same

network and configured to used it.• BMS

- Recommended for use in an intelligent building with an integral control system (building automation, security, access, etc.).

- The BMS uses a LonWorks information transmission protocol.- The use of the BMS restricts the use of the LON (Local Operating Network) exclusively to the building's

control room.

Table of contents

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue



1.3. Individual remote controls

PC-P2HTE

Fig. 2 PC-P2HTE Remote control

- Remote control with timer and temperature sensor.- Excellent display thanks to a large sized LCD screen, facilitating both programmable variable and possible

alarm indication readings.- Allows all indoor unit functions to be selected and changed.- Optimum air conditioning control with its weekly timer.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.

There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.

- Just one remote control can control up to 1� indoor units. - Operation lock procedure to avoid incorrect use of the buttons.- Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time

when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.

• Operation Mode:

- “COOL” for cooling, “HEAT” for heating, “DRY” for dehumidification and “FAN” for ventilation.

• “VENTI” Option:

- VENTI: only activates the KPI unit.- A/C: only activates the Air Conditioning unit.- A/C+VENTI: activates both at the same time, also allowing a forced delay of �0’ or 1 h when you want to

increase the equipment's energy savings.

• Additional functions:

- Weekly timer.- Defrosting, frost protection.- Clogged filter alarm.


1� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits

PC-P1HE

Fig. 3 PC-P1HE Remote control

- Remote control with start / stop timer and temperature sensor.- Excellent display thanks to a large sized LCD screen, facilitating both programmable variable and possible

alarm indication readings.- Allows all indoor unit functions to be selected and changed.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.


- Just one remote control can control up to 1� indoor units. - Operation lock procedure to avoid incorrect use of the buttons.- Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time

when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.

• Operation Mode:

- “COOL” for cooling, “HEAT” for heating, “DRY” for dehumidification and “FAN” for ventilation.

• “VENTI” Option:

- VENTI: only activates the KPI unit.- A/C: only activates the Air Conditioning unit.- A/C+VENTI: activates both at the same time, also allowing a forced delay of �0’ or 1 h when you want to

increase the equipment's energy savings.

• Additional functions:

- Defrosting, frost protection.- Clogged filter alarm.

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue



PC-P5H1E (PC-ARH)

Fig. 4 PC-P5H1E Remote control

- Operation mode selection.- Large sized LCD screen. - New optional functions.- Smaller remote control than conventional models.- Easy to use and therefore perfect for installations used by various different people. - Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.- Operation mode lock option.- Louver can be selected.- Louver can be selected.- Adjustable temperature limit.- Remote sensor.

PC-P5H

Fig. 5 PC-P5H Remote control

- Smaller remote control than conventional models.- Easy to use and therefore perfect for installations used by various different people.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.



PC-LH3A Wireless Remote Control

Fig. 6 PC-LH3A Remote control

- Wireless remote control that requires no wiring and provides simple one-touch operation. - Same remote control for all the units.- Each unit has its own receiver.- Two or more units can be controlled simultaneously.

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits


1.4. Central remote controls

PSC-5S

Fig. 7 PSC-5S Remote control

- 1� indoor unit groups can be connected, with 1 main remote control connected to a H-LINK on each group that can control up to a maximum of 128 indoor units.

- UP to 8 central remote controls (PSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.- Compatible with all the RCS and Timers.- In addition to the basic functions, operation mode and temperature setting, the air flow and automatic louver

can also be adjusted.- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the

error. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.- Also includes the option of receiving and sending external signals, along with the option to connect with the PSC-5T timer.

- The external signals control the following functions: -Simultaneousoperation/stopofalltheunits. -Simultaneousemergencystopofalltheunits. -Operationsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits. -Alarmsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits.

- The central station can be used together with each unit's individual remote control.

Fig. 8 PSC-5S Installation Diagram



CSC-5S

Fig. 9 CSC-5S Remote Control

- 8 chiller and 8 CSC-5S central remote control addresses can be connected for each H-LINK.- Up to 8 central remote controls (CSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.- A standard external input terminal is included for possible connection to a timer.- Basic functions, heat/cold mode and temperature setting.- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the

error. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.- The external signals control the following functions:

-Start/Stop -Operationmode(Cooling/Heating) -Settemperature(Cold/Heat)

Fig. 10 CSC-5S Installation Diagram

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue



PSC-5T

Fig. 11 PSC-5T Remote Control

- The PSC-5T is a programmable weekly timer that can be used together with other remote controls that do not have the a built in weekly timer option, so that when they are connected they are fully timer controlled.

- The 7 days of the week and the start/stop times can be scheduled up to � times a day with the PSC-5T timer.

- The remote control can be deactivated during the stoppage time (if it is used with the PSC-5S and PC-P1HE).

- It has two types of weekly schedules (A and B), which can easily be changed for winter and summer periods.

- All the settings are digitally displayed allowing the operation and settings to be checked easily.- The power failure safety function prevents the timer from stopping during a power cut (even if it lasts for

weeks).



1.5. Computerised Central Remote Controls (BMS)

HARC-BX E

Fig. 12 HARC-BX E Remote Control

- The use of just one BMS allows you to fully control the different systems installed in intelligent buildings, such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, etc.

- This type of remote control can act as link gateway interface with systems that use the LonWorks protocol (installations with intelligent control or BMS).

- HARC-BX E allows the control of up to 5 setting points and the remote supervision of a maximum of � values. With the HARC-BX E connected to a H-LINK network, a maximum of 8 outdoor units can be used and up to �� indoor units controlled.

- A maximum of 8 HARC-BX E can be connected to the same H-Link.- The HARC-BX E central remote control can be connected to any point of the H-Link system.- Status self-check. HARC-BX provides the necessary information for the BMS control to easily check the

system's operation and any alarms when they occur.

HARC-70CE1

Fig. 13 HARC-70CE1 Remote Control

- The use of just one BMS allows you to fully control the different systems installed in intelligent buildings, such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, etc.

- This type of remote control can act as link gateway interface with systems that use the LonWorks protocol (installations with intelligent control or BMS).

- With the HARC-70CE1 connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and 7 monitoring points of up to � chillers.

- With the HARC-70CE1 OP connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and up to �� monitoring points of one chiller unit.

- The HARC-70CE1 (OP) remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status.

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

2�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Table of contents

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

25PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2. INDIVIDUALREMOTECONTROLS.......................................................27

2.1. PC-P2HTE..............................................................................................27

2.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................27



2.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................29


2.1.4. Operation................................................................................................32



2.1.5.1.PC-P2HTEcommandfunctions..........................................................................402.1.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................412.1.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................44





Table of contents

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

2� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

General details

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

27PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2. INDIVIDUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

2.1. PC-P2HTE

2.1.1. General details

2.1.1.1. Selection advantages

I. General features:

-ExcellentdisplaythankstoalargeLCDscreenandasimpleindicationandreadingfunctionforprogrammevariablesandpossiblealarms.

-Excellentair-conditioningcontrolthankstotheweeklytimeroption,allowingtheuserstoadjusttheA/Cunitsettingstooperateonaone-weekbasis.

-Built-inself-diagnosticfunction.Awarningsystemindicatesanymalfunctionorproblembytriggeringandalarmcodewithdetailedinformationaboutthealarm.

-Allindoorunitfunctionscanbeselectedandadjustedusingtheremotecontrol.

-Upto16indoorunitscanbecontrolledonthesameoperationmode.

-Thisremoteincorporatesathermistoronthebottomrighthandsidewhichallowstheuserbetteradjustthedesiredroomtemperature,thankstotheinstallationofasensorclosertotheair-conditionedarea.

II. Remote control compatibility

This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that with two units installed, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.

Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:

Individual Remote Controls Remote receivers Wireless receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9 Receiver-FSNMPC-P5H PC-RLH8 Receiver-FSN1M

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1

Thisremotecontrolis100%compatiblewiththefollowingindoorunits:

Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407CRCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7ERPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7ERPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7RRPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7ERPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E

RPK-FSG2M* RPK-FSNM* RPFI-G7E

RCD-FSG(1/2) RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCI-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E

RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*RPF-FSG2Ei RPIM-FSNERPFI-FSG2Ei RCIM-FSNE

Tab. 2

* In these cases, the built in wireless receiver must be disconnected

General Details and General Dimensions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

28 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.1.2. Maintenance advantages

I. Alarm codes

There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit.The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.

II. Test run from the remote control

Auto-diagnostic: Quick diagnostics function for controller cards, cards in connected indoor units and cards in outdoor units (PCBs) using the LCD screen.

Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.

Optional function settings:• Various optional functions on the indoor units (IU) can be activated or deactivated using the remote control, for example:

-Calibrationphaseshiftof4SDgrCinheatingmode(seeTab.6,point).-Fanspeed.-Thermostat,etc.

• Several indoor units (IU) can be adjusted at the same time or their configuration can be changed after installation.

2.1.2. Dimension Details

15120

120

20

1234SSunSatFriThuWedTueSETSCHEDULENEXT

OFFONON

AUTOCONTROLOPER.LOCKNOFUNCTION RNHRADDS

%˚C

RCSTHMCHECKFILTER

TEMP.SET

LOWMEDHIGH

COOL

AUTO

HEATDRY

FAN

SERVICE

H.STRG

DEFROSTCENTRAL

T.RUNABNML

Mon

UNIT

A/C

VENTI

TEMPRUN/STOP

Fig. 1

Installation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

2�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.3. Installation

2.1.3.1. Safety summary

% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains

and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact

your HITACHI service provider.

$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or

any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.

- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.

2.1.3.2. Installation site selection

Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:

Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥0.75mm2

Cablelength 30m 500m

Tab. 3

Installation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.3.3. Space necessary for the installation

If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.

Atleast50mm

Fig. 2

2.1.3.4. Supply content

Prior to installation

NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4).- All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.

Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:

Name Quant. Comments

RemotecontrolDAY SCHEDULE

SELECT

LOUVERVENTI

MODE FANSPEED TIMER RESET

OK

1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation

M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall

Cabletie 1 Forattachingthecabletotheringcore

Ringcore 1 Forsecuringthecables

Tab. 4

Installation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.3.5. Installation procedure

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section as indicated in Fig. 3.

Screwdriver

BracketGroove

Hendiduras

SoporteDestornilladorScrewdriver Bracket

Groove

Bracket

Indentpart

Fig. 3

2. Place the control unit in the housing, as indicated below (2 examples):

I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.

ATerminal BTerminal

- Secure the bracket to the wall using the 2 screws provided.

- Insert the cable through the hole in the control unit. A hole can be made in the top centre and top left hand side (at the top in the image).

- Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.

Fig. 4

II. If using an electric control box.

There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.)

- Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box

1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.

2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.

3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.

$ CAUTION

Make sure the cable is not loose and that the length is correct. If it is left loose, it may become pinched when the control unit is fitted to the bracket, possibly causing an operational fault.

Fig. 5

Installation and Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

�. Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.

Connectteminals

Fig. 6

5. Control unit assembly procedure-Insertthehooksonthecontrolunitintotheholesontopofthebracket.-Pushthebottompartoftheunittowardsthebracket.-Aclicksoundindicatesthatthecontrolunitissecuredtothebracketandtheassemblyprocedureiscomplete.

2.1.3.6. Electrical connection

$ CAUTION

For operational and safety purposes, fit the ring core "attachment" when installing the unit.

- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in Fig. 7, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.

- If the cable measures 0.75mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.

- Secure the cable using the cable tie (accessory).

This diagram shows an example of a standard connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.

Fig. 7

2.1.4. Operation

NOTE

- If the LOW fan speed is selected and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.

- When the system is started after being out of use for more than 3 months, we recommend that the system is checked by the service provider.

- If the system is not going to be used for a long period of time, turn it off at the mains. Otherwise it will continue to consume electricity, since the oil heater remains on even when the compressor is off.

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.4.1. Description

Fanspeedindicator:Indicatesthefanspeedselected:HIGH,MEDorLOW

DAY SCHEDULE

SELECT

LOUVERVENTI


OK

Fig. 8 Model: PC-P2HTE

Operationmodeindicator:Indicatestheoperationmodeselected:FAN,COOL,HEAT,DRYorAUTO

Runindicator(greenLED)

Ventilationindicator:Indicateswhetherthetotalheatexchangerhasbeenselected*.(*see2.1.4.1.III)A/C airconditioningonlyVENTI totalheatexchangeronlyA/C+VENTI ifbothareselected

RUN/STOPbutton

MODEbutton

FANSPEEDbutton

Panelupanddownoperationbutton

VENTIbutton(ventilatoroperation)

LOUVERbutton(oscillatinglouveroperation)

SELECT(DAY/SCHEDULE)buttons

ON/OFFTIMERbutton(starts/stopstimer).(Usedtoactivateordeactivatethetimerfunction)

OKbutton

RESETbutton(resetsfilter)Aftercleaningtheairfilter,presstheRESETbutton.TheFILTERmessagewilldisappearandthenextfiltercleaningtimewillbeset.Itcanalsobeusedtoexitthecheckmodeandtheoptionalfunctionconfigurationmode.

TEMPbuttons(temperaturesetting)

T.RUNindicator(testrunindicator)OKindicatorTheseindicationsaredisplayedduringTESTRUNandOKoperations.

ABNMLindicator(alarm)FILTERindicatorPanelup/downindicator

SETTEMPindicator(temperaturesetting)

1234Sindicator(schedulenumbersetting).Mon,Tue...Sunindicator(indicatestheweekday).

Indicatesthestart/stoptimeforeachoftheunits.Timeindicator(indicatesthescheduledtime)NOFUNCTIONindicator(indicateswhenakeyhasnofunction)OPERLOCKindicator(keyslocked)ADDSindicator(indoorunits)RNHR:RNindicator(refrigerantcyclenumber)andHR(hoursofservice)

SERVICEindicator(servicemode:indicatesaswitchtospecialfunctions)CENTRALindicatorDEFROSTindicator

Timeindicator.

Louverindicator.

Tab. 5

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.4.2. Operation mode selection procedure

I. Procedure for operation in cooling, heating, dehumidifying and ventilation modes

• Switch on the power.TwoverticallinesaredisplayedontheLCDdisplaytogetherwiththeA/CorVENTIindications.

• Press the MODE button.Bypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillchangefromCOOLtoHEAT,DRYandFANmodes(orfromCOOLtoDRYandFANincoolingonlymodels).(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhenCOOLmodeisselected).

• Press the RUN/STOP button.Therunindicatorwilllightup(green).Thesystemwillstartupautomatically.

NOTE

Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction: Once this setting is made it is stored in the memory and therefore does not need to be set again every day. To change this setting, refer to the "II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction" section.

• Turn off (STOP)PresstheRUN/STOPbuttonagain.Therunindicator(green)willgooff.Thesystemwillstopautomatically.

NOTE

The fan may run for a further two minutes or so after stopping the system in heating mode.

II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction.

NOTE

- If the OK button is pressed for more than three seconds in operation mode, the unit will switch to check mode (CHECK).- In check mode (CHECK), by pressing the OK button once the user can view the different variables using the TEMP or buttons.- To return to operation mode, press and hold OK for more than three seconds and then press OK 2 twice.

• Setting the temperatureSetthetemperaturebypressingtheTEMPorbuttons.Thetemperatureincreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(max.30°C).Thetemperaturedecreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(min.19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode) (Thefigureshowsthetemperaturesetto28°C).

• Setting the fan speedPresstheFANSPEEDbutton.BypressingtheFANSPEEDbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillswitchfromHIGHtoMEDandLOW.TheunitisdesignedandsizedforoptimumoperationwiththefansettoHIGH.(ThefigureshowstheMEDspeedsetting.)

NOTE

In DRY mode, the fan speed changes automatically to LOW and cannot be changed (although the indicator will still show the current setting).

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�5PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

• Setting the louver direction1. PressingtheLOUVERbuttonstartsthelouver.Thelouveroscillatesatapproximately70°fromthehorizontaltovertical

position.Whenthe“ “symbolmoves,thisindicatesthatthelouverisoscillating.

2. Whenthelouveroscillationfunctionisnotrequired,presstheSWINGLOUVERbuttonagain.Theoscillatorwillstop(althoughnotimmediately,asindicatedinpoint3)attheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ “symbol.

3. Bycommandingthelouvertomovetoaspecificposition,itwillmovefromtheinitialpositiontoverticalandwillthenriseagaintothehorizontalposition,beforefinallymovingtothepositionindicatedbytheuser.

• Fixed positionForcoolingmodes,theairoutletanglecanbesettooneof5differentpositions.Inheatingmode,itcanbesettooneof7positions.

• Automatic oscillation positionThelouverpositionindicatorswillmovecontinuouslyaccordingtotheoscillationofthelouver.

NOTE

- In heating mode, the louver angle changes automatically.- There is a phase shift between the actual angle of the louver and that indicated on the LCD screen. When the SWING LOUVER button

is pressed, the louver does not stop immediately. It will move an oscillate again before stopping. - To find out the exact louver angles, check the corresponding catalogue for the unit installed.

III. Ventilation mode procedure

NOTE

This function is only available when the total heat exchanger is connected*. When carrying out the following procedures without the total heat exchanger connected, the NO FUNCTION indication will flash for 5 seconds.*Total heat exchanger: When adjusting the temperature, the indoor unit will release air from inside the room and replace it with air from outside. To adjust the air from outside to the temperature setting inside the room, it is passed through the total heat exchanger. The air pre-treated (pre-conditioned) in this heat exchanger is routed to the indoor unit where it is conditioned and then circulated into the room.

• VentilationPressVENTIbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorchangesfromA/CtoVENTIandA/C+VENTI.(ThefigureshowstheA/C+VENTIsetting).

NOTE

- If the system mode is changed to VENTI during individual air conditioning system operation, the system will switch off.

- If the system mode is changed A/C during individual operation of the total heat exchanger, it will switch off.

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

IV. Automatic COOL/HEAT mode procedure

AutomaticCOOL/HEATmodemustbeconfiguredasanoptionalfunction.ThisfunctionallowsthesystemtobeswitchedautomaticallytoCOOL/HEATmodebasedonthedifferencebetweenthetemperaturesettingandandthetemperatureofthesuctionair.Iftheintakeairexceedsthetemperaturesettingby3°C,thesystemwillswitchtoCOOLmodeand,ifitis3°Clessthanthetemperaturesetting,thesystemwillswitchtoHEATmode.

NOTE

- If the heating function is set to LOW, the overload protection devices will often shut-off the system. When this happens, set the fan speed to HIGH or MED (medium).

-If the outdoor temperature is above 21°C, the system will not operate in heating mode.

V. Timer function procedure

• Setting the current date and time

1.PresstheSELECTDAY ▼ buttonforatleast3secondstochangefromoperationmodetothecurrentdaysettingmode.SETwillbedisplayedandthedaywillflash.Allofthedaysoftheweekaredisplayed.

:SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

2.PresstheSELECTDAY ▼ buttonuntilthecurrentdayisflashingandpressOK.Allthedayswilldisappearexcepttheselectedday,andthetimewillstarttoflash. :

SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

3.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ tomovethe"hour"upanddown;onceset,pressOK.The"hour"willstopandthe"minutes"willstarttoflash. :

SET Wed

4.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ againtosetthe"minutes"and,onceset,pressOKagain.Thecurrenttimesettingmodewillendandthesystemwillreturntooperationmode.The"minutes"willbedisplayedandSETwillturnoff.The"seconds"willstarttocountfromzero.

:Wed

• Setting the timer schedules

1.PresstheTIMERbutton.SETwillbedisplayedandthefirstschedulenumber"1"willflash.Therestoftheschedulenumberswillremainfixed.

NOTE

Pressing and holding the TIMER button for more than 3 seconds activates the weekday timer schedule setting. (See point VI).

:SET 1234S

SCHEDULEON OFF:

2.BypressingtheSELECTSCHEDULE ▲ button,theschedulenumberwillchangeinsequence:[1][2][3][4][S][1]….,-Byselecting[S],theusercansettheon/offtimeandthetemperaturechangeasameansof

savingenergy(checkthesectiononsettingthetemperaturechange).-BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitches

tooperationmode.

:SET 1234S

ADDS

SCHEDULE

RNkHR

ON OFF:

3.PressingtheOKbuttonindicatestheselectedschedulenumber.Theotherschedulenumberswillswitchoffandtheswitch-on"hour"fortheselectedprogramwillflash. :

SET 1SCHEDULEON

OFF:

4.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ toadjustthe"hour"and,onceset,pressOK.The"hour"willstopandthe"minutes"willstarttoflash. :

SET 1SCHEDULEON

OFF:

5.PresstheSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ buttontoadjustthe"minutes"and,onceset,pressOK.The"minutes"willremainfixedandtheswitch-off"hour"willflash. :

SET 1SCHEDULEON

OFF:

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�7PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

6.Settheswitch-offtimebyfollowingthesameprocedureastheswitch-ontime.Theschedulewillbestoredinthememoryandalltheavailableschedulewillreappear(1,2,3,4,S).

NOTE

Repeat from step 2 onwards to adjust the other schedule settings.

:SET 1

SCHEDULEON OFF:

7.BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitchestooperationmode. :

SNEXT SCHEDULE

OFF:Mon

VI. Assigning timer schedules to the days of the week.

1.PresstheTIMERbuttonformorethan3secondsandSETwillappear.Allthedaysoftheweekwillbedisplayedalongwiththeschedulenumbers(asexplainedinthepreviouspoint). :

SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234SON OFF:

2.PresstheDAY▼buttonuntilthedesireddayappears.Whenpressed,thedaysoftheweekwillflash:[Mon][Tue]…[Sun][Mon~Sun][Mon~Fri][Sat,Sun][Mon]…Ifseveraldaysflash,thesamesettingwillapplytoallofthesedays.

3.PresstheSCHEDULE ▲ buttonuntilthedesiredschedulenumberflashes.:

SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234SON OFF:

4.PressOK;theschedulenumberselectedinstep3appliestothedayssetinstep2.PressingOKwilleitheractivateordeactivatetheschedule.Ifitisactivated,thewordSCHEDULEwillbedisplayedabovetheswitch-offtime.

:SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234S

SCHEDULEON OFF:

5.PresstheTIMERbutton;thesystemwillexittheprogrammingmode(SETwillswitchoff)andreturntooperationmode. :

MonNEXT SCHEDULE

OFF:

VII. Cancelling the timer

Inoperationmode,pressandholdDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.NEXTSCHEDULEwillflash.(Theentiretimersettingiscancelled) :

Mon 1234SNEXT SCHEDULE

ON:

Intimercancellationmode,pressandholdDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.NEXTSCHEDULEwillappear.(Timeractivation) :

Mon 1234SNEXT SCHEDULE

ON:

VIII. Setting the temperature change (energy-saving mode).

1.Followtheswitch-on/switch-offsettingprocedureinsteps1and2ofthe"Settingthetimerschedules"sectionandselectprogram"S". :

1234SSCHEDULEON

OFF:SET

2.Followtheswitch-on/switch-offsettingprocedureinsteps4,5and6inthe"Settingthetimerschedules"sectionandsettheswitch-on/switch-offtime.Thiswillbringupthesettingtemperature.

:1234S

SCHEDULEON OFF:

SET

3.SelectthetemperaturechangeusingtheTEMPbuttons.Atthispoint,iftheRESETbuttonispressed,thetemperaturechangewillnotbesetand“--”willbedisplayed. :

1234SSCHEDULEON

OFF

SET

:

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�8 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

4.BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitchestooperationmode. :

SNEXT SCHEDULE

OFF:Mon

NOTE

1. Carrying out this operation will change the temperature setting indicator.2. The increase or decrease of the set temperature during the scheduled time (±3 °C or ±5 °C) will vary depending on the operation

mode. - If operating in "ventilation", "cooling" or "dehumidifying" mode, the temperature variation is + . - If operating in "heating" mode, the temperature variation is - .

IX. Automatic heating operation (freeze protection)

• ActivationInoperationmode,presstheMODEbuttonforatleast3seconds.AutomaticheatingoperationisactivatedandONwillappeartotherightofthecurrenttime.ONwillflashcontinuouslyduringautomaticheatingoperation.

:Mon

NEXT SCHEDULEON

OFF:

• CancellationDuringautomaticheatingoperation,presstheMODEbuttonforatleast3secondstochangetotheoperationmode.TheautomaticheatingoperationisswitchedoffandtheONindicationtotherightofthecurrenttimewilldisappear.

:Mon

NEXT SCHEDULE

OFF:

NOTE

If the room temperature drops below a certain level*, the heating will switch on automatically. In this case, when the room reaches the temperature setting, the system will switch off.

* The user may select (5/10/15 °C) through an optional setting (see Tab. 6, option FE).

X. Operating lock procedure

Toavoidanyincorrectuseofthebuttons,theycanbelocked(seebelow).• ActivationInoperationmode,presstheSELECT ▲ ▼ buttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.TheoperationlockwillbeactivatedandOPER.LOCKwillbedisplayedIfabuttonispressedduringthistime,OPER.LOCKwillflash.

:Mon

NEXT SCHEDULE

OFF

OPER.LOCK

:

• CancellationWhilesystemoperationislocked,presstheSELECT ▲ ▼ buttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3secondstoreturntooperationmode.TheoperationlockwillbecancelledandOPER.LOCKgoesoff.

:Mon

NEXT SCHEDULE

OFF:

NOTE

- The button to be locked can be selected in "change operation mode", "temperature setting", "air flow" and "automatic louver" through an optional setting (F8~Fb) indicated in Tab. 6.

- This setting can be changed from a second remote control.

Operation

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

XI. Indications in normal conditions

• Thermostat StoppageWhenthethermostatoftheunitisoff,thefanspeedchangestoLOWandtheindicatorwillnotchange.(Heatingmodeonly.)

• DefrostWhenthesystemisrunningindefrostmode,theDEFROSTindicationwillappear.Thefanoftheindoorunitwillslowdownorstop(asselected).Thelouverwillstopinthehorizontalpositionat35°.However,theindicatorontheLCDscreenwillremainon.(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhensettoDEFROST.)

Whentheunitstopsduringdefrostmode,therunindicator(green)willswitchoff.However,thesystemwillcontinuetodisplayDEFROSTandtheunitwillstart-uponcethedefrostmodeiscomplete.

• FilterCloggedfilter:TheFILTERindicationwillappearwhenthetimeprogrammedinfunctionb4(seeTab.6andTab.7)expires,indicatingthatitneedstobecleaned.Cleanthefilter:PresstheRESETbuttonaftercleaning.TheFILTERsignwillturnoff.

XII. Indications in abnormal conditions

• Abnormal conditionTherunindicator(green)willflash.TheALARMindicatorwillbedisplayedontheLCDscreen.Thescreenwillalsoindicatethenumberoftheindoorunit,thealarmcodeandthemodelcode.Ifseveralindoorunitsareconnected,theseindicationswillbedisplayedforeachone,oneatatime.NotedowntheindicationsandcontactyourHITACHIserviceprovider.

• Power failureAllon-screenindicationswilldisappear.Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailure,itwillnotrestartautomatically,evenwhenthepowerisrestored.Intheeventofapowerfailurelastingnomorethan2seconds,theunitwillrestartautomatically.

• Electrical noiseTheremaybecaseswhenallofthedisplayindicationsareoffandtheunitisstopped.Thisisbecausethemicrocomputerhasswitchedontoprotecttheunitfromelectricalnoise.

NOTE

- In cases where a wireless remote control is being used for the indoor wall type unit, remove the connectors (CN25) connected to the indoor PCB. Otherwise, the unit will not work.

- Stored data cannot be deleted unless the remote control is reset.

Indoorunitnumber

Alarmcode

CodeModel

Numberofconnectedindoorunits

Alarmcode

Alternateindicationeverysecond

Model number

Indication Model

H Heatpump

P Inverter

F Multiple

C Coolingonly

E Other

IVX,individual

operation

L KPI

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.5. Optional functions

2.1.5.1. PC-P2HTE command functions

Theremotecontrolchangestheoptionalsettingmodewiththefollowingprocedures.Theoptionalfunctionsareprogrammedusingtheremotecontrol.

• Programming and setting modeCheckthattheunitisoff,pressandholdtheremotecontrolbuttons"OK"and"RESET"simultaneouslyforatleast3secondsandthecontrolwillchangetothefieldsettingmode.Oncethemodeischanged,theunitwilldisplaythe"SERVICE"indication,withthenumber“0”flashbelowit.

• Optional setting mode. Selecting SERVICE Inprogrammingandsettingmode(mentionedabove),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”andthenumberflashingbeneaththe“SERVICE”indicationwillchange(0<=>02).Settheflashingnumberto“0”,press"OK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.

• Selecting the indoor unita.Inoptionalsettingmode,selectingSERVICE0willchangetheindicatoronthe

remotecontroldisplay,asshowninthefollowingdiagram. Indication"0”willbeactivated. Theaddressoftheindoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetis

indicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"ADDS"appearingbelow.

Therefrigerantcyclenumberoftheoutdoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetisindicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"RN"appearingbelow.

Thesettingtemperatureindicationisdeactivated.

b.Atthepointmentionedabove(a),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”ontheremotecontrolinordertochangetheindoorunitonwhichyouwishtosettheoptionalfunction.

NOTE

- The indoor unit can be selected from among those connected to the remote control.- If the indication for both the address and the refrigerant cycle is "AA", the settings for

all indoor units are the same.

c.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press"OK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.

:

• Changing optional functions and setting conditionsa.Inoptionalsettingmode,theindicationonthecontroldisplaywillchange,asshown

below.

Theindications"ADDS"and"RN"willbedeactivated. Thesettingconditionoftheoptionalfunctionisindicatedinthetimersetting

hourindicationsections. Theoptionalfunctionnumberisindicatedinthesettingtemperatureindication

section.

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

b. Press either “SELECT ▲” or “SELECT ▼” and the optional function indication will change, as shown below.

Whenpressing“SELECT▲”

2 2 ... e f2

Whenpressing“SELECT▲”

c. Press "OK" and the setting condition of the optional function will change, as shown below.

00 0 ... 08

• Selecting a different indoor unitIfyoupress“TEMP”or“TEMP”whenintheoptionalsettingmode,theconditionoftheremotecontrolchangesothattheindoorunitmaybeselectedtosettheoptionalfunction,asdescribedabove.

• Returning from optional function setting mode to operation modePressthe"RESET"buttontostoretheoptionalfunctionsettingandreturntooperationmode.

2.1.5.2. Optional functions list

Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description

Settingtheinternalcontrolfunctionsofthe

IU.

Resettingheatingtemperaturecalibration.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoresetadifferenceof4°C.

0 Available

2 Maintainingventilationspeedduringthermostatstoppageinheatingmode.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.

0 Available

C Drainpumpactivatedinheatingmode.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoactivatethedrainpumpinheatingmode.

0 Available

C Selectingstaticpressure. 00 Averagestaticpressure(factorysetting)

ThisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelsinRPIunitsusingtheremotecontrol.0 Highstaticpressure

02 Lowstaticpressure

Increasefanspeed(RCD)(RCI).

00 Normal Thisfunctionisusedtochangethefanspeedforroomswithhighceilings.

0 Speedincrease1

02 Speedincrease2

C Maintainingthefanspeedincreaseduringathermostatstoppageinheatingmode(RCD)(RCI).

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC5.

0 Available

C8 Remotecontrolthermistor. 00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol

Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

0 Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor

02 Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor

C Selectionoflogicofthecontactusedforexternalcontrols.

00 Normallyopencontact Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicoftheforcedshutdown.

0 Normallyclosedcontact

Tab. 6 Optional functions list (continued on next page)

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

(continued from previous page)


Settingthecontrolfunctions

oftheOU

3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoprotectthecompressorwhenitisfrequentlystartedandstopped.

0 Available

C Cancellationofthe3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".

0 Available

Remotecontrolinternalcontrol

functions

Changingfiltercleaningtimes

00 Standard Thisfunctionallowsyoutochangethetimeindicatedbytheremotecontrolforchangingtheairfilteroftheindoorunit.

0 100hours

02 1200hours

0 2500hours

0 Noindication

Lockingoperationmode 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangetheoperationmode.

0 Available

Lockingthetemperaturesetting

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethesettingtemperature.

0 Available

Lockingunittocooling-onlymode

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesoffheatingmode.

0 Available

8 Automaticcooling/heatingoperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesautomaticallyfromcoolingtoheating.

0 Available

Lockingairflow 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethefanspeed.

0 Available

F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols

00 Primary Thisfunctionisusedwhentworemotecontrolsareinstalledforonesystem

0 Secondary

F8 Modelock00 Unlocked

Thisfunctionisusedtolockthe"indicatedsettingpoints"ontheremotecontrolwhenapplyingthe"OperatingLockProcedure"describedinpoint2.1.4.1.X

0 Locked

F Temperaturelock00 Unlocked

0 Locked

FA Fanlock00 Unlocked

0 Locked

F Swinglouverlock00 Unlocked

0 Locked

FCSettingtheminimumtemperatureincoolingmode

0

a0 +1~+10

InColdmode,thetemperaturerangeissetas:

- Max. = �0 °C- Min.: from 1� to 27

FdSettingthemaximumtemperatureinheatingmode

0

a0 -1~-10

InHeatmode,thetemperaturerangeissetas:

- Max. = from 20 to �0- Min. = 17

FETemperatureduringautomaticheatingoperation

00 Setto5°C

Freezeprotection0 Setto10°C

02 Setto15°C

Tab. 6 Optional functions list, continued (continued on next page)

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

(continued from the previous page)


Settingremotecontroladditional

systems.

d Switchinguniton/offaftermainspowerfailure/restoration.

00 Notavailable. Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.

0 Available

d Savingtheunitstatusafteranelectricalpowerfailure.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.

0 Available

Settingadditionalsystemcontrol

functions.

E Coolingmodeusingoutdooraironly.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).

0,02 Available

(KPI)Ventilationmode. 00 Automaticventilation Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.

0 Ventilationthroughtotalheatexchanger.

02 Ventilationbypass(withouttotalheatexchanger)

E2 (Econofresh)Outdoorhumiditysensor.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheusertocontroltheoutdoorairintakebasedonthehumiditysensorconnected.0 Available

(KPI)Increasedairsupply. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoensurethattheairpressureintheroomisgreaterthanthepressureintheadjoiningrooms.

0 Available

E (Econofresh)Gassensor. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoforcetherecyclingofairintheroomwhenthegassensor(CO2)isactivated.0,02 Available

(KPI)Previouscooling/heatingperiods.

00 Standard Thisfunctiondelaysthestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.

0 30minutes

02 60minutes

Tab. 6 Optional functions list

ElementsC,C2,C,C,CA,CC,d2,E,E,F,F,F,F,Fhavenofunctionassigned.

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.5.3. Remote control optional functions

. Resetting heating temperature calibration.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheremotecontrolsettingorset-pointtemperatureandtheindoorunitsuctionairtemperatureneedtobethesame.Instandardheatingmode,thesuctionairtemperatureisgreaterthanthatoftheroom,thereforethesettingtemperatureusediscalibratedtotheindicatedtemperature+4°C.SettingTemperatureUsed=IndicatedSettingTemperature+4°C(b1=0)/+0°C(b1=1)Thisfunctionisusefulwhenthethermistorisremovedfromtheindoorunitsuctionareaandisinstalledinadifferentlocation.

Thefollowingtableshowstheindicatedsettingtemperatureandthesuctionairtemperatureafterresettingtheheatingtemperaturecalibration.

2 . Maintaining ventilation speed in the event of a thermostat stoppage in heating mode.Ifthefanspeedchangesto"LOW"whenthethermostatoftheunitisstopped,theairintheroommaybecomestratifiedduetohotairaccumulatingontheceiling.Inthiscase,werecommendtheuseofthecirculationpumpfunctionexplainedbelow.

Thisfunctionmaintainstheventilationspeedwhenaunitrunninginheatingmodehasathermostaticfault.Thiskeepsthemovementoftheairintheroomatthesamelevelaswhenthethermostatisrunning,ensuringauniformairdistribution.Iftheindoorunitisfittedwithanautomaticswinglouver,thiswillalsobekeptrunningwhentheheatingthermostatisdeactivated.

. 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.Whenacompressorisfrequentlystartedandstoppedovershortintervals,itmustbeprotectedbyusingthisfunction.Activatingthisfunctionaddstheminimumthree-minuteoperationmode(astopmodeofaminimumthreeminutesisstandard).IfusingSET-FREE,thisfunctionisconfiguredbydefault.

NOTE

When the safety device is activated or the "ON/OFF" button is pressed, the compressor will stop immediately.

. Changing filter cleaning times.Thefrequencyoftheindicationtocleanthefilterispre-setatthefactory.

However,cleaningtimescanbechangeddependingontheconditionofthefilter,asshowninthefollowingtable:

Filter indication periodApprox. 100

hoursApprox. 1200

hoursApprox. 2500

hoursNo indication

Forbuilt-in4-waytype Periodchanged Periodchanged Factorysetting Periodchanged

Remotecontrolliquidcrystaldisplay 0 02

0 or00 (*)

0

Tab. 7

(*)FortheRPKmodel,thefactorysettingis200hours

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�5PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

. Locking the operation mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheoperationmodedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactivated,theselectedoperationmodecannotbechanged.

. Locking the setting temperature.Thisfunctionisusedwhenthesettingtemperaturedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactive,theselectedsettingtemperaturecannotbechanged.

. Locking the unit to cooling-only mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheunitisrequiredtooperateincoolingmodeonly.ThisfunctioncancelsoutheatingmodeandAUTOautomaticoperationontheunit,leavingitexclusivelyforcoolingoperation.

8 . Automatic cooling/heating operation.Thisfunctionisusedtooperatetheunitsothatitswitchesautomaticallybetweencoolingandheatingmodes.Thisfunctiondoesnotworkwhentheoutdoorunitisacooling-onlymodelorwhen"lockingunittocooling-onlymode”isselected.

. Locking the fan speed.Thisfunctionisusedtolockthefanspeed.Whenactivated,thefanspeedcannotbechangedusingtheremotecontrol.

C . Drain pump activated in heating mode.Thisfunctionisusedtostartthedrainpumpinheatingmode.However,forSET-FREEsystems,theindoorunitsarenotfittedwithhumidifiers.Donotchangethe“00”settingconditionofthe“C”element.

C . High Speed / Static Pressure.ForRCI/RCDunits,thisfunctionisusedtoincreasefanspeedforindoorunitsinstalledinroomswithhighceilings.Therearetwosettings;0speedincrease1and02speedincrease2.ForRPIunits,thisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelswiththeremotecontrol.

C . Maintaining the increased fan speed during a thermostat stoppage in heating mode (RCD)(RCI)Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitoperatinginheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC.

C . Cancellation of the 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.ForSET-FREEsystems,theaforementioned"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation"describedinfunction()isthestandarddefaultfunction.Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

C8 . Remote control thermistor.Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitusingtheremotecontrolthermistorinsteadofthesuctionairthermistor,althoughthetwocanbeusedtogether.Setto“0”or“02”whenusedEvenwhenthefunctionissetto“0”or“02”,ifthetemperaturedetectedisincorrectdue,forexample,toafaultintheremotecontrolthermistor,thesuctionairthermistorintheindoorunitsareautomaticallyusedbydefault.

Thesettingconditionandventilationmodeareshownbelow:

Setting condition

Ventilation mode Description

00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol.

Differentfunctionsforcontrollingtheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

01Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

02Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor.

Tab. 8

C . Selecting the logic of the contact for external controls.Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicofthecontactfortheforcedshutdowninputsignal.

Thesettingconditionandcontactlogicareshownbelow.

Setting conditionContact

logicSequence

Activation"Open" contact

"Closed" contact

00 ContactA NormalForced

shutdown

01 ContactBForced

shutdownNormal

Tab. 9

d . Switching unit on/off after mains power failure.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.

NOTE

The unit switches on and off in accordance with the power on/off setting in the event of a power failure. If the failure occurs during a stoppage activated by the remote control, the unit will restart automatically once the power source is restored.

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�7PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

d . Power source on/off.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.Thisfunctionisusedtorestarttheunitautomaticallywhenthepowersourceisrestoredafterapowerfailureofmorethan2seconds.Thecompressorunitwillrestartamaximumof3minutesafterthefailure,inadditiontothe2secondsofdowntime.

NOTE

In the event of a power failure when the unit is stopped, it will switch off after the power supply is restored.

E . Ventilation mode (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.


Setting condition


00 AutomaticventilationSelectionofanefficientventilationmode(ventilationwithtotalheatexchangerorventilationbypass)tosaveenergybydetectingtheindoor/outdoortemperaturedifference.

01Totalheatexchanger

ventilation.Theheatexchangeiscontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.

02 VentilationbypassTheheatexchangeisnotcontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.

Tab. 10

E . Cooling mode using outdoor air onlyThisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).

Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.

Setting condition

Outdoor cooling mode Description

00 Notavailable Theoutdoorgrilleistotallyclosed.

01 Available Theoutdoorgrilleisfullyopen.


Tab. 11

E2 . Increased air supply (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheairsupplyvolumebyincreasingthespeedofthesuctionairfaninrelationtotheoutputairmotor;thisincreasesthepressureintheroomwithagreaterairvolumethantheadjoiningrooms,avoidingtheintakeofcontaminatedairorbadsmells.

Theremotecontrolairflowsettingandtheactualairflowofthetotalheatexchangerwhenthisfunctionisactivatedarelistedbelow.

Remote control air flow setting Total heat exchanger air flowLOW MEDIUM

MEDIUM HIGH

HIGH HIGH

Tab. 12

Optional functions

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�8 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

E2 . Outdoor humidity sensor (Econofresh).Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinletbycontrollingtheairhumidity,openingorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.


Setting condition Humidity sensor Description00 Notavailable Thehumiditysensorisnotavailable.

01 Available Thehumiditysensorisavailable.

Tab. 13

NOTE

If a "HIGH" air flow is set using the remote control, the total heat exchanger air flow will also be "HIGH”, even when the user needs to adjust this function.

E . Previous cooling/heating periods (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtodelaythestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.

Thesettingconditionandthedelayperiodareshownbelow.

Setting condition Start-up delay period00 0minutes

01 30minutes

02 60minutes

Tab. 14

E .Gas sensor (Econofresh)Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinlet,controllingthelackofoxygenandanyexcessiveCO2build-upbyopeningorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.


Setting condition Gas sensor Condition00 Notavailable Thegassensorinletisnotavailable.

01 Available Thegassensorinletisavailable.


Tab. 15

f2 . Setting remote control as Primary or SecondaryThisfunctionisusedtosettworemotecontrolsconnectedtooneindoorunit:oneasPrimaryandtheotherasSecondary

Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Theremotecontrolissetasprimary.

02 Available Theremotecontrolissetassecondary.

Tab. 16

Maintenance and repair

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.6. Maintenance and repair

2.1.6.1. Abnormal transmission between the remote control and indoor unit

Inthiscase,theLEDrunindicatorlocatedatthebottomleftofthescreenwillflashevery2seconds.


Before analysing these problems, the system must be switched off at the mains.

Problem Cause Check point Action

Disconnectionorinadequatecontactoftheremotecontrolcable.

Cablingproblem Checkthecableandtheconnections. Repairorconnectthecable.

Remotecontrolfault. DifferentcausesCheckremotecontrolusing

theself-checkmode*1.Replacetheremotecontrol,iffaulty.

PCBfault(ontheindoorunitandremotecontrol).

WiredisconnectedfromPCB

Checkconnectors. Connectwirescorrectly.

PCBfault CheckPCBusingtheself-checkmode*2. ChangethePCB,iffaulty.

Tab. 17

*1: See section 2.1.6.4. II*2: See section 2.1.6.4. I

2.1.6.2. Troubleshooting procedure for units connected to the remote control

Possible causes:

- The remote control cable is broken.- Remote control cable contact failure.- Remote control plate failure.- If the LED run indicator flashes 5 times for 5 seconds, the display will show the unit number and alarm code

(see Fig. � and Fig. 10).-Notedownthecode(seeTab.18)andrequestassistancefromyourdistributor.

Unitnumber Alarmcode Modelcode

Refrigerantcyclenumber Numberofunitsconnected

Fig. 9

Model number

Indication Model

H Heatpump

P Inverter

F Multiple

C Coolingonly

E Other

IVX,individual

operation

L KPI

Tab. 18


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

50 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Table of alarm codes

Code No.

Category Abnormal condition Main cause

01 Indoor unit Protection device activation. Drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation. PSH activation.

0� Transmission Abnormal transmission between the indoor and the outdoor unit.

Incorrect wiring. PCB fault. Fuse disconnected. Power supply switched off.

0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB. Fan controller transmission fault.

0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller. Fan controller transmission fault.

05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring. Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.

0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit.

Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or insufficient power supply wiring capacity.

07Cycle

Reduced discharge gas superheating. Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.

08 Increased discharge gas temperature. Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.

0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation. Fan motor fault.11

Indoor unit sensor

Inlet air thermistor.

Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor.1� Freeze-protection thermistor.1� Gas piping thermistor.15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh).1� Activation of the fan motor protection device. Fan motor fault.21

Outdoor unit sensor

High pressure sensor.

Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.

22 Outdoor air thermistor.2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor.2� Evaporating thermistor.

2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor .

2� Low pressure sensor.

�0

System

System with an incorrect connection. There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.

�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting. Incorrect capacity code setting.

�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit.

Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.

�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting. The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.

�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.

�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit. Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.

�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor. Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.

��

Pressure

Pressure rate decrease protection activation. Fault with the compressor, inverter

�� Low pressure increase protection activation.Overload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.

�5 High pressure increase protection activation. Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�� High pressure decrease protection activation. Insufficient refrigerant�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation. Insufficient refrigerant51

Inverter

Abnormal inverter current sensor. Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation. Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage

5� IPM protection activation. Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)

5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins. Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�

Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection. Abnormal transmission detection circuit

57 Fan controller protection activation. Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller. Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin��

KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor. Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor.

EE Inverter Compressor protection. �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage

Tab. 19


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

51PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.6.3. Troubleshooting on check mode

UsetheOKbuttonontheremotecontrolinthefollowingcases:1. WhentheLEDrunindicatorisflashing.2. Tomonitorthecauseoftheproblemafterasystemrestartduetoastoppagewith

RUNindicatorflashing.3. Toperformchecksduringnormaloperationorstoppage.4. Tomonitortheinletairanddischargeairtemperatures.

DAY SCHEDULE

SELECT

LOUVERVENTI


OK

Fig. 10

Check modesCheckmode1: Indicatingthecurrentdata.Checkmode2: Indicatingthedatasavedimmediatelybeforethefault.

Step No. Check modes

Normalmode1 Pressthebuttonforatleast3seconds

-Theindicationwillbedelayedsincethetransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandtheindoorunittakesaround10seconds.

-Alldatamaybedisplayedas“FF”,“-1”or“255”.Thesetemporaryvaluesgeneratedbythesoftwaredonotaffectthefunctionsofthedeviceatall.

(Thealarmcodemayalsobedisplayedas“FF”).

2Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed :

Alarmcodeidentifyingthelastfaultthatoccurredontheindicatedunit.Numberoftheconnectedunitoroftheunitforwhichthecheckmodewaspreviouslyset.

ADDS:Numberoftheindoorunitofcycleno.**RN:No.**Refrigerantcycleno.**

3 Forthenext7seconds. 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

52 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Checkmode14 After7seconds

Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.

Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.

5 PressandholdthebuttonOK

5 foratleast3secondstoentercheckmode2

Ifwecontinueincheckmode1,steps6and7arearepetitionofsteps2and3.Seenoteinpoint8.

6Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed :

Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.

7After7seconds 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.

Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13

8

Notefrompoint5.

NOTE

From check mode 1, the user may only enter check mode 2 - the check mode cannot be switched off

Checkmode29 Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.


-Incheckmode2,theusercanaccessdatafromthefirstthreeunitsconnectedinsequencetoaremotecontrol.

10Checkmodeswitchedoff Pressandholdthebutton

OK

5 foratleast3seconds.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

5�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

I. Content of check mode 1

Bypressing“}”consecutively,thefollowingindicationswillbedisplayed.

Indicationoftemperature,etc.

Categorycodeindication

Step No. Temperature indication

1 Indoorunittemperaturesetting(°C). 22

2 Indoorunitairinlettemperature(°C). 2 20

3 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperature(°C).

4 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(°C). 20

5

Remotesensortemperature(°C).-Thisisonlydisplayedwhenconnectedtoaremotesensor.

Thedisplaynormallyshows“--”.TheRPKseriescannotconnecttoaremotesensor.Theindicationistherefore“--”.

2

6 Outdoorunitambienttemperature(°C). 0

7 Indoorunitheatexchangerrefrigerantgaspipingtemperature(°C). 2

8 Outdoorunitevaporatingtemperatureduringheating(°C). 8 02

9Controlinformation.-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.

FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning. --

10

Dischargegasrefrigeranttemperatureintopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis

given.-Ifthetemperatureexceeds126°C,theindicationwillread“126”.

A

11 Remotecontrolthermostattemperature. 2

NOTE

• Possible abnormal conditions

TEMPERATURE INDICATION FAULT

--Open circuit on any thermistor except 2

Check that the PCB is not reading the thermistor incorrectly. Consult the "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control" section

2Open circuit in compressor discharge thermistor

FF or2

Short-circuit in any thermistor except 2

2Short-circuit in compressor discharge thermistor

During transitory periods, such as on start-up, the "--" or "00" indicator may appear for a limited time.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

5� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Microcomputer input/output indication

12 Indoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C Z

Heat Thermostat on

Cold Thermostat on

Alarm

Operation

YH2

Y52H

Dark

13 Outdoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C2 -

Y211

Y212

Y52C1Y52C2

Y20B

Y20A

DarkFan operating

PCBrelay PartnameYH2 Relayfordrainpump(MD)and/ordewheater(EHW).Y52H Relayforelectricheater(CEH).Y211

4-wayvalverelay.Y212

Y52C1Compressorrelay.

Y52C2Y20A

Solenoidvalverelay.Y20B

Tab. 20

Symbols with the letter Y are relays on the indoor/outdoor unit PCB plate.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

55PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Unit stoppage cause indication

14 Causeofthestoppage. d 0

Codes:

00 Operationstopped,powerswitchedoff.

0 Thermostatswitchedoff(seebottomsectionpoint1).

02 Alarm(seebottomnotesectionpoint2).

0 Freezeprotection,overheatingprotection

0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheoutdoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point3)).

0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheindoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point4)).

0Coolingprocessstoppedduetoalowoutdoortemperature,heatingprocessstoppedduetoahighoutdoortemperature.

08 Compressorquantitychangeover,stoppage.

0 4-wayvalvechangeoverstoppagerequest(FXonly).

0 Stoppagerequest,forcedstoppage.

Retryduepressureratereduction.

2 Retryduetoincreasedlowpressure.

Retrydueincreasedhighpressure.

Retryduetoabnormalcurrentintheconstantspeedcompressor.

Retryduetoabnormalhightemperatureofthedischargegas,excessivelylowsuctionpressure.

Retryduetoreducedoverheatingofthedischargegas.

Retryduetoinverterdisconnection.

8 Retryduetovoltagereduction.

Expansionvalveopeningchangeprotection.

20 Indoorunitoperationmodechangeover(seebottomnotesectionpoint5).

2 Forcedthermostatdeactivationwhendeactivatedonanotherindoorunit.

22 Hot-startafter4hourswithoutdooruniton.

2 Thermostatoffduringenergy-savingmode.

Tab. 21

NOTE

1. Explanation of terms: Thermostat on: A condition where the indoor unit requests compressor activation. Thermostat off: A condition where the indoor unit does not request compressor activation.

2. Although the stoppage is caused by an "alarm", it does not always indicate "02".3. If the transmission between the control printed circuit boards of the inverter and the control is not made within 30 seconds, a stoppage

will occur due to cause d1-05 and alarm code "04" may be displayed.4. If the transmission between the indoor and outdoor units is not made within 3 minutes, the indoor units will stop.

In this case, the stoppage is due to cause d1-06 and alarm code "03" may be displayed.5. The FSN system will read 20 when different modes are selected for indoor units.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

5� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Abnormal operation occurrence counter

15 Abnormaloperationoccurrencecounter E 0

16 Indoorunitinstantaneouspowerfailureoccurrencecounter. E2 00

17 Remotecontroltoindoorunittransmissionerroroccurrencecounter. E 00

18 Abnormalinverteroperationoccurrencecounter. E 00

- Counts up to ��.- For counts above "��”, it will always read "��".

NOTE

- If a transmission error lasts for more than 3 minutes, one occurrence is added to the counter. - Stored data can be deleted by following the instructions given in section 2.2.6.4. "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote

control".

Step No. Indication of automatic swing louver status

19 Swinglouversensor. F 00

- 00 : Normal - FF : Abnormal

Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator

20 Dischargepressure(high)(x0.1MPa). H 8

21 Suctionpressure(low)(x0.01MPa). H2 0

22Controlinformation:Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. H

23Operatingfrequency(Hz):Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. H


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

57PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Indoor unit capacity indication

24 Indoorunitcapacity. J 08

Theindoorunitcapacityisindicatedasshowninthefollowingtable:

Indoor unit capacity code

IndicationcodeEquivalentcapacity

in(CV)

06 0,8

08 1

10 1,3

13 1,5

14 1,8

16 2

18 2,3

20 2,5

22 2,8

26 3/3,5

32 4

40 5

48 6

64 8

80 10

Tab. 22

25

Outdoorunitcode:“n”indicatesthetotalnumberofindoorunits.

J2 Fnn = ~ , , A, , C, d, E, F, U(10) (11) (12) (1�) (1�) (15) (1�)

26Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J3:01~16(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),decimal

indication:J 0

27Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J4:00~0F(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),hexadecimal

indication(16numbers).J 00


28 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. L 20

29 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. L2

30OutdoorunitMV2expansionvalveopening.-Formodelswithnoexpansionvalve,thesamevaluewillappearonbothMV2andMV1 L

31OutdoorunitMVBexpansionvalveopening.-FXNonly. L 00

Step No. Estimated electrical current indication

32Compressorcurrent.-Thetotalcurrentisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce.

Fortheinvertercompressor,theoperatingcurrentfromtheprimarysideoftheinverterisindicated.P 2

33 Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

58 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

II. Content of check mode 2

Whenmorethanthreeindoorunitsareconnectedtooneremotecontrol,onlythemostrecentdatafromthethreefirstindoorunitsconnectedinsequencewillbeshown.Pressing“}”ontheTEMPbuttontakesyoutothenextscreen,whilepressing“~”onthesamebuttontakesyoutothepreviousscreen.




1 Indoorunitairinlettemperatureinthethermistor(°C). 2

2 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperatureinthermistor(°C). 2 0

3 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(freezeprotection)(°C). 2

4 Outdoortemperature(°C). 2

5 Indoorunitheatexchangergaspipingtemperature(°C). 2

6 Evaporatingtemperatureinheatingmode(°C). 0

7Controlinformation-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. --

8Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-Whentwocomponentsarerunningsimultaneously,theaveragetemperatureisgiven. 8

NOTE






FF or 2

Short-circuit in any thermistor except 2




PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

5�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


9Controlinformation-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.-FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning.

8

10Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsisgiven. A 0

11Remotecontrolthermostattemperature-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.-Ithasnospecificmeaning.

12Operatingfrequency(Hz)-Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. C

Step No. Indication of the expansion opening

13 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. d 20

14 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. E


15Compressor operating current-Thetotalvalueisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. F 20


2.1.6.4. Checking procedure for each main component

PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control

Use the following troubleshooting procedure to check the PCB in both indoor and outdoor units.Step No. Action required Image

1 StopthemachinebypressingtheRun/Stopbutton. PressRUN/STOP

2PCBcheckmode:Press and hold both buttons for � seconds.

TEMP OK} 5

3Indicationofthenumberoftheoutdoorunit(RN)andindoorunit(ADDS)towhichtheremotecontrolisconnected.

e.g.:Indicationofunitno. “0”

:

4After7seconds:AutomaticPCBoperationcheck.

(continued on next page)


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Step No. Action required

5After5seconds(maximum30sintheeventofatransmissionfailurebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits):Thedisplaywillindicateamaximumof3typesofFAULTS.

Types of abnormal condition

Abnormaloperationcondition(1)

After1secondAbnormaloperationcondition(2)


Codes:

Indication Condition

00 Normal

Abnormalcondition(opencircuit,short-circuit,etc.)onacircuitfor:

0 Airinlettemperaturethermistor

Indoor unit PCB

02 Dischargeairtemperaturethermistor

0 Liquidpipingtemperaturethermistor

0 Abnormalremotethermistor


0 Remotesensor

08 Transmissionfromcentralstation

0A EEPROM

0 Zero-crossinputfault

EE Transmissionfromindoorunitsduringcheck

0 Transmissionfromoutdoorunit

Outdoor unit PCB

F Faninletinternalthermostatfault

F PSWinputfault

F PSHprotectionsignaldetectioncircuit

F Phasedetection

F8 Transmissionfrominverter

FA Highpressuresensor

F Dischargegastemperaturethermistorofthecompressor

FC Lowpressuresensor

Fd Heatexchangerevaporationtemperaturethermistor

FF Ambientairtemperaturethermistor

Tab. 23



PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Step No. Action required Image

6 Pressbutton

7 Ifthereisanotherunit.Nextunitself-checkindication.TEMP} ~

8 e.g.:Indicationofunitn°“2”.:

9 After7seconds.

10From1to5seconds.

11 After1second. J3 J4 J2

12 Pressbutton SwitchoffPCBcheckmode

NOTE

- If this condition persists and alarm code “J1” is not displayed, this means that none of the indoor units have been connected to the remote control. Check the wiring between the remote control and the indoor unit.

- During this troubleshooting procedure, the following PCB parts cannot be checked. - Indoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit, ventilation circuit, protection circuit - Outdoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit.- If this system troubleshooting procedure is run through the central station, the central station indication may change during the

procedure. Please note that this is normal.- After this troubleshooting procedure is complete, the memory of the meter storing the abnormal conditions described above will be

erased.

Tocarryoutthepreviouscheckusingawirelessremotecontrolwithareceiverbuiltintoanindoorwalltypeunit,usethefollowingprocedure:

1. Switch off the power source.2. Disconnect connector (CN25) on PWB(M).�. Connect the PC-P2HTE.�. Switch on the power.

Oncecheckiscomplete,switchoffthepowersourceagainandreconnecttheconnectorsastheywerebeforethecheck.


PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.6.5. Remote control self-checking procedure

WhentousetheOKbutton:1.Whentheremotecontroldisplaysanoperatingfault.2.Forperiodicmaintenancechecks.


1 Switchonthepowersource.

2Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.(Thebuttonsmaybepressedwhenthesystemisrunning)

TEMP MODE

} ~ 5

3

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.

No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)

1

âFor1second

2

âFor1second

3

âFor1second

4

âFor1second

5

âFor3seconds

TodeleteEEPROMmemoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.

TEMP MODE

} ~ 5Goto 11

4 OncetheLCDscreenhaschanged,theRUNindicatorwillflashtwice. 01

5

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Pressallbuttons(13),oneatatime.Eachtimethebuttonispressed,theindicationnumbershowninpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagramwillincreasebyone.-Thecheckcannotproceedtothenextstepuntilallthebuttonsarepressed.

0002

NOTE

The buttons may be pressed in any order.If two or more switches are pressed at once, the action is not valid and is therefore not registered.



PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



6

TheLCDwillchange,asshownbelow:Theremotecontrolwillbegintocheckthetransmissioncircuitautomatically.-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononthetransmissioncircuit,theLCDscreenwill

remainasshowninthediagramontheright,andthecheckwillnotproceedtothenextstep.

03

7

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow:Thetemperaturedetectedbytheremotecontrolthermostatisindicatedinpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagram:

2004

NOTE

If the “--” or “FF” indicators are displayed in part “A”, the remote control thermostat is faulty.

8

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow. 05

IftheRESETbuttonispressedornobuttonsarepressedfor15seconds,alldataintheremotecontrolEEPROMmemorywillbeerased.Atthispoint,thenumberisindicatedinpart(A)asshownbelow.Whenthenumber“”appears,theEEPROMmemoryisfaulty.Ifthenumberindicatedinpart(A)is“”,thecheckwillnotproceedtothenextcomponent.

0005

9TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Afterafewseconds,theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically. 06

10ErasingtheEEPROMmemory(fromstepNo.3).TheLCDscreenwillchangeasshownbelow,andtheremotecontrolwillerasetheEEPROMmemoryautomatically.

07

11Afterafewseconds,theLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically.Inthiscase,thesystemwillnotstarttorunautomatically.

08

PC-P2HTE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.1.7. Remote control optional accessories

2.1.7.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)

Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11

During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.For more information on this cable, see the following table:

Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications

PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5colourbeige(2twistedcables) Ø1.32

(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCBside

Remotecontrolside

A B

Cablecolour

Black White

PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-�0E1 �0 TPC

Tab. 24*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable

2.1.7.2. 3-pin connector cord

Optional connector for central controls.

This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.

Model Application Comments Specifications

PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB

JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).

Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)

300mm(approx.)

Tab. 25

Remote control optional accesories

Table of contents

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�5PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.2. PC-P1HE................................................................................................67

2.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................67



2.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................69


2.2.4. Operation................................................................................................72



2.2.5.1.PC-P1HEcommandfunctions............................................................................782.2.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................792.2.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................82





PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

General details

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�7PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2. PC-P1HE




- Excellent display thanks to a large LCD screen and a simple indication and reading function for programme variables and possible alarms.

- Excellent air-conditioning control thanks to the timer option, allowing the users to adjust the A/C unit operation setting schedules.

- Built-in self-diagnostic function. A warning system indicates any malfunction or problem by triggering and alarm code with detailed information about the alarm.

- All indoor unit functions can be selected and adjusted using the remote control.

- Up to 1� indoor units can be controlled on the same operation mode.

- This remote incorporates a thermistor on the bottom right hand side which allows the user better adjust the desired room temperature, thanks to the installation of a sensor closer to the air-conditioned area.




Individual Remote Controls Remote receivers Wireless receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9 Receiver-FSNMPC-P5H PC-RLH8 Receiver-FSN1M

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1

This remote control is 100% compatible with the following indoor units:

Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407C

RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7ERPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7ERPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7RRPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7ERPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E



RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*RPF-FSG2Ei RPIM-FSNERPFI-FSG2Ei RCIM-FSNE

Tab. 2


General Details and Dimensions details

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�8 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


I. Alarm codes


II. Test run from the remote control

Auto-diagnostic: Quick diagnostics function for controller cards, cards in connected indoor units and cards in outdoor units (PCBs) using the LCD screen.

Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.

Optional function settings:• Various optional functions on the indoor units (IU) can be activated or deactivated using the remote control, for example:

-Calibrationphaseshiftof4SDgrCinheatingmode(seeTab.6,point).-Fanspeed-Thermostat,etc.

• Several indoor units (IU) can be adjusted at the same time or their configuration can be changed after installation.

2.2.2. Dimension details

15120

120

20

MEDHIGH ON/OFFTIMER TEMP.SET

UNIT

T.RUNABNML

VENT

A/C CENTRALH.STRG

DEFROSTNOFUNCTION

SERVICE

CHECKFILTER

LOW ADDSRNHR

FAN

DRYAUTO

HEATCOOL

LOUVERSWING

TEMPRUN/STOP

Fig. 1

Installation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2.3. Installation






$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or







Tab. 3

NOTE

Do not install the remote control in the following places:- Within the reach of children.- Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.

Installation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

70 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



Alleast50mm

Fig. 2



NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4). - All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.



Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation




Tab. 4

Installation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

71PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



Screwdriver

BracketGroove

Hendiduras


Groove

Bracket

Indentpart

Fig. 3

2. Place the control unit in the housing, as indicated below (2 examples):


TerminalA TerminalB

- Secure the bracket to the wall using the 2 screws provided.

- Insert the cable through the hole in the control unit. A hole can be made in the top centre and top left hand side (at the top in the image).

- Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.

Fig. 4


There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example:-Electricalboxforonecontrolunit(withorwithoutcover.)-Electricalboxfor2controlunits(withorwithoutcover.)-Othertypesofbox

1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.

2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.

3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.

$ CAUTION

Make sure the cable is not loose and that the length is correct. If it is left loose, it may become pinched when the control unit is fitted to the bracket, possibly causing an operational fault.

Fig. 5

Installation and Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

72 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

�. Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.

Connecttheterminals

Fig. 6

5. Control unit assembly procedure-Insertthehooksonthecontrolunitintotheholesontopofthebracket.-Pushthebottompartoftheunittowardsthebracket.-Aclicksoundindicatesthatthecontrolunitissecuredtothebracketandtheassemblyprocedureiscomplete.


$ CAUTION


- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in Fig. 7, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.



This diagram shows an example of a standard connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.

Fig. 7

2.2.4. Operation

NOTE




Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

7�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Fanspeedindicator:Indicatesthefanspeedselected:HIGH,MEDorLOW

Fig. 8 Model: PC-P1HE

Operationmodeindicator:Indicatestheoperationmodeselected:FAN,COOL,HEAT,DRYorAUTO

Runindicator(redpilotlight)

Ventilationindicator:Indicateswhetherthetotalheatexchangerhasbeenselected*.

(*see3.1.4.1.III)A/C airconditioningonlyVENTI totalheatexchangeronlyA/C+VENTI ifbothareselected

RUN/STOPbutton

MODEbutton

FANSPEEDbutton

Panelupanddownoperationbutton

VENTIbutton(ventilatoroperation)

LOUVERbutton(oscillatinglouveroperation)

�TIME button (time setting) (Increases or reduces the time set for the timer operation).

ON/OFFTIMERbutton(starts/stopstimer).Usedtoactivateordeactivatethetimerfunction.

CHECKbutton

RESETbutton(resetsfilter)Aftercleaningtheairfilter,presstheRESETbutton.TheFILTERmessagewilldisappearandthenextfiltercleaningtimewillbeset.Itcanalsobeusedtoexitthecheckmodeandtheoptionalfunctionconfigurationmode.

TEMPbuttons(temperaturesetting)

T.RUNindicator(testrunindicator)CHECKindicatorTheseindicationsaredisplayedduringTESTRUNandCHECKoperations.

ABNMLindicator(alarm)FILTERindicatorPanelup/downindicator

SETTEMPindicator(temperaturesetting)Timer ON/OFF ( timer operation indicator)Alarm code indicatorNOFUNCTIONindicator(indicateswhenakeyhasnofunction)ADDSindicator(indoorunits)RNHR:RNindicator(refrigerantcyclenumber)andHR(hoursofservice)SERVICEindicator(servicemode:indicatesaswitchtospecialfunctions)

CENTRAL (central control operation indicator) Indicates control of the central station or CS-Net. DEFROST indicator

Louverindicator.

Tab. 5

Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

7� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2.4.2. Operation Mode Selection Procedure

I. Procedure for operation in cooling, heating, dehumidifying and ventilation modes

• Switch on the power.TwoverticallinesaredisplayedontheLCDdisplaytogetherwiththeA/CorVENTIindications.

• Press the MODE button.Bypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillchangefromCOOLtoHEAT,DRYandFANmodes(orfromCOOLtoDRYandFANincoolingonlymodels).(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhenCOOLmodeisselected).

• Press the RUN/STOP button.Therunindicatorwilllightup(red).Thesystemwillstartupautomatically.

NOTE

Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction: Once this setting is made it is stored in the memory and therefore does not need to be set again every day. To change this setting, refer to the "II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction" section.

• Turn off (STOP)PresstheRUN/STOPbuttonagain.Therunindicator(red)willgooff.Thesystemwillstopautomatically.

NOTE

The fan may run for a further two minutes or so after stopping the system in heating mode.

II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction.

NOTE

- If the CHECK button is pressed for more than three seconds in operation mode, the unit will switch to check mode (CHECK).- In check mode (CHECK), by pressing the CHECK button once the user can view the different variables using the TEMP or

buttons.- To return to operation mode, press and hold CHECK for more than three seconds and then press CHECK twice.

• Setting the temperatureSetthetemperaturebypressingtheTEMPorbuttons.Thetemperatureincreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(max.30°C).Thetemperaturedecreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(min.19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode).(Thefigureshowsthetemperaturesetto28°C).

• Setting the fan speedPresstheFANSPEEDbutton.BypressingtheFANSPEEDbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillswitchfromHIGHtoMEDandLOW.TheunitisdesignedandsizedforoptimumoperationwiththefansettoHIGH.(ThefigureshowstheMEDspeedsetting.)

NOTE

In DRY mode, the fan speed changes automatically to LOW and cannot be changed (although the indicator will still show the current setting).

Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

75PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

• Setting the louver direction1. PressingtheLOUVERbuttonstartsthelouver.Thelouveroscillatesatapproximately70°fromthehorizontaltovertical

position.Whenthe“ “symbolmoves,thisindicatesthatthelouverisoscillating.

2. Whenthelouveroscillationfunctionisnotrequired,presstheSWINGLOUVERbuttonagain.Theoscillatorwillstop(althoughnotimmediately,asindicatedinpoint3)attheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ “symbol.

3. Bycommandingthelouvertomovetoaspecificposition,itwillmovefromtheinitialpositiontoverticalandwillthenriseagaintothehorizontalposition,beforefinallymovingtothepositionindicatedbytheuser.

• Fixed positionForcoolingmodes,theairoutletanglecanbesettooneof5differentpositions.Inheatingmode,itcanbesettooneof7positions.

• Automatic oscillation positionThelouverpositionindicatorswillmovecontinuouslyaccordingtotheoscillationofthelouver.

NOTE

- In heating mode, the louver angle changes automatically.- There is a phase shift between the actual angle of the louver and that indicated on the LCD screen. When the SWING LOUVER button

is pressed, the louver does not stop immediately. It will move an oscillate again before stopping. - To find out the exact louver angles, check the corresponding catalogue for the unit installed.

III. Ventilation mode procedure

NOTE

This function is only available when the total heat exchanger is connected*. When carrying out the following procedures without the total heat exchanger connected, the NO FUNCTION indication will flash for 5 seconds.*Total heat exchanger: When adjusting the temperature, the indoor unit will release air from inside the room and replace it with air from outside. To adjust the air from outside to the temperature setting inside the room, it is passed through the total heat exchanger. The air pre-treated (pre-conditioned) in this heat exchanger is routed to the indoor unit where it is conditioned and then circulated into the room.

• VentilationPressVENTIbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorchangesfromA/CtoVENTIandA/C+VENTI.(ThefigureshowstheA/C+VENTIsetting).

NOTE

If the system mode is changed to VENTI during individual air conditioning system operation, the system will switch off. If the system mode is changed A/C during individual operation of the total heat exchanger, it will switch off.

Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

7� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

IV. Automatic COOL/HEAT mode procedure

AutomaticCOOL/HEATmodemustbeconfiguredasanoptionalfunction.ThisfunctionallowsthesystemtobeswitchedautomaticallytoCOOL/HEATmodebasedonthedifferencebetweenthetemperaturesettingandandthetemperatureofthesuctionair.Iftheintakeairexceedsthetemperaturesettingby3°C,thesystemwillswitchtoCOOLmodeand,ifitis3°Clessthanthetemperaturesetting,thesystemwillswitchtoHEATmode.

NOTE

- If the heating function is set to LOW, the overload protection devices will often shut-off the system. When this happens, set the fan speed to HIGH or MED (medium).

-If the outdoor temperature is above 21°C, the system will not operate in heating mode.

V. Timer mode procedure

• Press the ON/OFF TIMER button.ON TIMER appears when the system is off. OFF TIMER appears when the system is on. (The figure shows the setting for ON TIMER).• Press the TIME ∆ or ∇ button and set the time required.

The time increases �0 minutes when the ∆ button is pressed (max. 2� hours) and is reduced �0 minutes when the ∇ button is pressed (min. 0.5 hours).If the time is not set, it will automatically be configured to 8.00 hours. (The figure shows a timer setting at 8.5 hours)• To cancel the settingPress the ON/OFF TIMER button again.

VI. Indications in normal conditions

• Thermo-controllerWhenthethermo-controllerisoperating,thefanspeedchangestoLOWandtheindicationisnotchanged.(Heatingmodeonly.)

• DefrostWhenthesystemisrunningindefrostmode,theDEFROSTindicationwillappear.Thefanoftheindoorunitwillslowdownorstop(asselected).Thelouverwillstopinthehorizontalpositionat35°.However,theindicatorontheLCDscreenwillremainon.(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhensettoDEFROST.)

Whentheunitstopsduringdefrostmode,therunindicator(green)willswitchoff.However,thesystemwillcontinuetodisplayDEFROSTandtheunitwillstart-uponcethedefrostmodeiscomplete.

• FilterCloggedfilter:TheFILTERindicationwillappearwhenthetimeprogrammedinfunctionb4(seeTab.6andTab.7)expires,indicatingthatitneedstobecleaned.Cleanthefilter:PresstheRESETbuttonaftercleaning.TheFILTERsignwillturnoff.

Operation

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

77PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

VII. Indications in abnormal conditions

• Abnormal conditionThe run indicator (green) will flash. The ALARM indicator will be displayed on the LCD screen. The screen will also indicate the number of the indoor unit, the alarm code and the model code. If several indoor units are connected, these indications will be displayed for each one, one at a time. Note down the indications and contact your HITACHI service provider.• Power failureAll on-screen indications will disappear. When the unit stops due to a power failure, it will not restart automatically, even when the power is restored.In the event of a power failure lasting no more than 2 seconds, the unit will restart automatically.• Electrical noiseThere may be cases when all of the display indications are off and the unit is stopped. This is because the microcomputer has switched on to protect the unit from electrical noise.

NOTE

-��In�cases�where�a�wireless�remote�control�is�being�used�for�the�indoor�wall�type�unit,�remove�the�connectors�(CN25)�connected�to�the�indoor�PCB.�Otherwise,�the�unit�will�not�work.�

-�Stored�data�cannot�be�deleted�unless�the�remote�control�is�reset.

Indoorunitnumber

Alarmcode

CodeModel

Numberofconnectedindoorunits

Alarmcode

Alternateindicationeverysecond

Model number

Indication Model

H Heatpump

P Inverter

F Multiple

C Coolingonly

E Other

IVX,individual

operation

L KPI

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

78 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


2.2.5.1. PC-P1HE command functions

Theremotecontrolchangestheoptionalsettingmodewiththefollowingprocedures.Theoptionalfunctionsareprogrammedusingtheremotecontrol.

• Programming and setting modeCheckthattheunitisoff,pressandholdtheremotecontrolbuttons"CHECK"and"RESET"simultaneouslyforatleast3secondsandthecontrolwillchangetothefieldsettingmode.Oncethemodeischanged,theunitwilldisplaythe"SERVICE"indication,withthenumber“0”flashbelowit.

• Optional setting mode. Selecting SERVICE 0Inprogrammingandsettingmode(mentionedabove),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”andthenumberflashingbeneaththe“SERVICE”indicationwillchange(0<=>02).Settheflashingnumberto“0”,press"CHECK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.

• Selecting the indoor unita.Inoptionalsettingmode,selectingSERVICE0willchangetheindicatoronthe

remotecontroldisplay,asshowninthefollowingdiagram. Indication"0”willbeactivated. Theaddressoftheindoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetis

indicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"ADDS"appearingbelow.

Therefrigerantcyclenumberoftheoutdoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetisindicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"RN"appearingbelow.

Thesettingtemperatureindicationisdeactivated.

b.Atthepointmentionedabove(a),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”ontheremotecontrolinordertochangetheindoorunitonwhichyouwishtosettheoptionalfunction.

NOTE

- The indoor unit can be selected from among those connected to the remote control.- If the indication for both the address and the refrigerant cycle is "AA", the settings for

all indoor units are the same.

c.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press"CHECK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.

• Changing optional functions and setting conditionsa.Inoptionalsettingmode,theindicationonthecontroldisplaywillchange,asshown

below.

Theindications"ADDS"and"RN"willbedeactivated. Thesettingconditionoftheoptionalfunctionisindicatedinthetimersetting

hourindicationsections. Theoptionalfunctionnumberisindicatedinthesettingtemperatureindication

section.

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

7�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

b. Press the “TIME ▲” or “TIME ▼” button and the optional function indication will change as shown below.

Whenpressing“TIME▲”button

2 2 ... e f2

Whenpressing“TIME▲”button

c. Press "CHECK" and the setting condition of the optional function will change, as shown below.

00 0 ... 08

• Selecting a different indoor unitIfyoupress“TEMP”or“TEMP”whenintheoptionalsettingmode,theconditionoftheremotecontrolchangesothattheindoorunitmaybeselectedtosettheoptionalfunction,asdescribedabove.

• Returning from optional function setting mode to operation modePressthe"RESET"buttontostoretheoptionalfunctionsettingandreturntooperationmode.

2.2.5.2. Optional functions list


Settingtheinternalcontrolfunctionsofthe

IU.

Resettingheatingtemperaturecalibration.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoresetadifferenceof4°C.

0 Available

2 Maintainingventilationspeedduringthermostatstoppageinheatingmode.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.

0 Available

C Drainpumpactivatedinheatingmode.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoactivatethedrainpumpinheatingmode.

0 Available

C Selectingstaticpressure. 00 Averagestaticpressure(factorysetting)

ThisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelsinRPIunitsusingtheremotecontrol.0 Highstaticpressure

02 Lowstaticpressure

Increasefanspeed(RCD)(RCI).

00 Normal Thisfunctionisusedtochangethefanspeedforroomswithhighceilings.

0 Speedincrease1

02 Speedincrease2

C Maintainingthefanspeedincreaseduringathermostatstoppageinheatingmode(RCD)(RCI).

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC5.

0 Available

C8 Remotecontrolthermistor. 00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol

Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

0 Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

02 Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor

C Selectionoflogicofthecontactusedforexternalcontrols.

00 Normallyopencontact Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicoftheforcedshutdown.

0 Normallyclosedcontact

Tab. 6 Optional functions list (continued on next page)

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

80 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

(continued from previous page)


Settingthecontrolfunctions

oftheOU

3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoprotectthecompressorwhenitisfrequentlystartedandstopped.0 Available

C Cancellationofthe3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".0 Available

Remotecontrolinternalcontrol

functions

Changingfiltercleaningtimes

00 Standard Thisfunctionallowsyoutochangethetimeindicatedbytheremotecontrolforchangingtheairfilteroftheindoorunit.

0 100hours

02 1200hours

0 2500hours

0 Noindication

Lockingoperationmode 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangetheoperationmode.

0 Available

Lockingthetemperaturesetting

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethesettingtemperature.

0 Available

Lockingunittocooling-onlymode

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesoffheatingmode.

0 Available

8 Automaticcooling/heatingoperation

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesautomaticallyfromcoolingtoheating.

0 Available

Lockingairflow 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethefanspeed.

0 Available

F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols

00 Primary Thisfunctionisusedwhentworemotecontrolsareinstalledforonesystem

0 Secondary

Settingremotecontroladditional

systems.

d Switchinguniton/offaftermainspowerfailure/restoration.

00 Notavailable. Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.0 Available

d Savingtheunitstatusafteranelectricalpowerfailure.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.

0 Available

Tab. 6 Optional functions list, continued (continued on next page)

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

81PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



Settingadditionalsystemcontrol

functions.

E Coolingmodeusingoutdooraironly.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).

0,02 Available

(KPI)Ventilationmode. 00 Automaticventilation Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.0 Ventilationthroughtotalheat

exchanger.

02 Ventilationbypass(withouttotalheatexchanger)

E2 (Econofresh)Outdoorhumiditysensor.

00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheusertocontroltheoutdoorairintakebasedonthehumiditysensorconnected.0 Available

(KPI)Increasedairsupply. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoensurethattheairpressureintheroomisgreaterthanthepressureintheadjoiningrooms.

0 Available

E (Econofresh)Gassensor. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoforcetherecyclingofairintheroomwhenthegassensor(CO2)isactivated.0,02 Available

(KPI)Previouscooling/heatingperiods.

00 Standard Thisfunctiondelaysthestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.

0 30minutes

02 60minutes

F OFFtimerautomaticsetting. 00 Nofunction ThisfunctionisusedtoautomaticallysettheOFFtimerwhentheunitisstartedupbytheremotecontrol.

0 Disconnectionafter1hour

02 Disconnectionafter2hours

~ ...



Tab. 6 Optional functions list

ElementsC,C2,C,C,CA,CC,d2,E,E,F,F,F,F,Fhavenofunctionassigned.

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

82 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2.5.3. Remote control optional functions

. Resetting heating temperature calibration.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheremotecontrolsettingorset-pointtemperatureandtheindoorunitsuctionairtemperatureneedtobethesame.Instandardheatingmode,thesuctionairtemperatureisgreaterthanthatoftheroom,thereforethesettingtemperatureusediscalibratedtotheindicatedtemperature+4°C.SettingTemperatureUsed=IndicatedSettingTemperature+4°C(b1=0)/+0°C(b1=1)Thisfunctionisusefulwhenthethermistorisremovedfromtheindoorunitsuctionareaandisinstalledinadifferentlocation.Thefollowingtableshowstheindicatedsettingtemperatureandthesuctionairtemperatureafterresettingtheheatingtemperaturecalibration.

2 . Maintaining ventilation speed in the event of a thermostat stoppage in heating mode.Ifthefanspeedchangesto"LOW"whenthethermostatoftheunitisstopped,theairintheroommaybecomestratifiedduetohotairaccumulatingontheceiling.Inthiscase,werecommendtheuseofthecirculationpumpfunctionexplainedbelow.

Thisfunctionmaintainstheventilationspeedwhenaunitrunninginheatingmodehasathermostaticfault.Thiskeepsthemovementoftheairintheroomatthesamelevelaswhenthethermostatisrunning,ensuringauniformairdistribution.Iftheindoorunitisfittedwithanautomaticswinglouver,thiswillalsobekeptrunningwhentheheatingthermostatisdeactivated.

. 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.Whenacompressorisfrequentlystartedandstoppedovershortintervals,itmustbeprotectedbyusingthisfunction.Activatingthisfunctionaddstheminimumthree-minuteoperationmode(astopmodeofaminimumthreeminutesisstandard).IfusingSET-FREE,thisfunctionisconfiguredbydefault.

NOTE

When the safety device is activated or the "ON/OFF" button is pressed, the compressor will stop immediately.

. Changing filter cleaning times.Thefrequencyoftheindicationtocleanthefilterispre-setatthefactory.

However, cleaning times can be changed depending on the condition of the filter, as shown in the following table:

Filter indication periodApprox. 100

hoursApprox. 1200

hoursApprox. 2500

hoursNo indication

Forbuilt-in4-waytype Periodchanged Periodchanged Factorysetting Periodchanged

Remotecontrolliquidcrystaldisplay 0 02

0 or00 (*)

0

Tab. 7

(*)FortheRPKmodel,thefactorysettingis200hours

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

8�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

. Locking the operation mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheoperationmodedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactivated,theselectedoperationmodecannotbechanged.

. Locking the setting temperature.Thisfunctionisusedwhenthesettingtemperaturedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactive,theselectedsettingtemperaturecannotbechanged.

. Locking the unit to cooling-only mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheunitisrequiredtooperateincoolingmodeonly.ThisfunctioncancelsoutheatingmodeandAUTOautomaticoperationontheunit,leavingitexclusivelyforcoolingoperation.

8 . Automatic cooling/heating operation.Thisfunctionisusedtooperatetheunitsothatitswitchesautomaticallybetweencoolingandheatingmodes.Thisfunctiondoesnotworkwhentheoutdoorunitisacooling-onlymodelorwhen"lockingunittocooling-onlymode”isselected.

. Locking the fan speed.Thisfunctionisusedtolockthefanspeed.Whenactivated,thefanspeedcannotbechangedusingtheremotecontrol.

C . Drain pump activated in heating mode.Thisfunctionisusedtostartthedrainpumpinheatingmode.However,forSET-FREEsystems,theindoorunitsarenotfittedwithhumidifiers.Donotchangethe“00”settingconditionofthe“C”element.

C . High Speed / Static Pressure.ForRCI/RCDunits,thisfunctionisusedtoincreasefanspeedforindoorunitsinstalledinroomswithhighceilings.Therearetwosettings;0speedincrease1and02speedincrease2.ForRPIunits,thisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelswiththeremotecontrol.

C . Maintaining the increased fan speed during a thermostat stoppage in heating mode (RCD)(RCI)Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitoperatinginheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC.

C . Cancellation of the 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.ForSET-FREEsystems,theaforementioned"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation"describedinfunction()isthestandarddefaultfunction.Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

8� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

C8 . Remote control thermistor.Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitusingtheremotecontrolthermistorinsteadofthesuctionairthermistor,althoughthetwocanbeusedtogether.Setto“0”or“02”whenusedevenwhenthefunctionissetto“0”or“02”,ifthetemperaturedetectedisincorrectdue,forexample,toafaultintheremotecontrolthermistor,thesuctionairthermistorintheindoorunitsareautomaticallyusedbydefault.


Setting condition


00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol.

Differentfunctionsforcontrollingtheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

01Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.

02Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor.

Tab. 8

C . Selecting the logic of the contact for external controls.Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicofthecontactfortheforcedshutdowninputsignal.

Thesettingconditionandcontactlogicareshownbelow.

Setting conditionContact

logicSequence

Activation"Open" contact

"Closed" contact

00 ContactA NormalForced

shutdown

01 ContactBForced

shutdownNormal

Tab. 9

d . Switching unit on/off after mains power failure.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.

NOTE

The unit switches on and off in accordance with the power on/off setting in the event of a power failure. If the failure occurs during a stoppage activated by the remote control, the unit will restart automatically once the power source is restored.

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

85PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

d . Power source on/off.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.Thisfunctionisusedtorestarttheunitautomaticallywhenthepowersourceisrestoredafterapowerfailureofmorethan2seconds.Thecompressorunitwillrestartamaximumof3minutesafterthefailure,inadditiontothe2secondsofdowntime.

NOTE

In the event of a power failure when the unit is stopped, it will switch off after the power supply is restored.

E . Ventilation mode (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.


Setting condition


00 AutomaticventilationSelectionofanefficientventilationmode(ventilationwithtotalheatexchangerorventilationbypass)tosaveenergybydetectingtheindoor/outdoortemperaturedifference.

01Totalheatexchanger

ventilation.Theheatexchangeiscontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.

02 VentilationbypassTheheatexchangeisnotcontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.

Tab. 10

E . Cooling mode using outdoor air onlyThisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).


Setting condition

Outdoor cooling mode Description

00 Notavailable Theoutdoorgrilleistotallyclosed.



Tab. 11

E2 . Increased air supply (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheairsupplyvolumebyincreasingthespeedofthesuctionairfaninrelationtotheoutputairmotor;thisincreasesthepressureintheroomwithagreaterairvolumethantheadjoiningrooms,avoidingtheintakeofcontaminatedairorbadsmells.

Theremotecontrolairflowsettingandtheactualairflowofthetotalheatexchangerwhenthisfunctionisactivatedarelistedbelow.

Remote control air flow setting Total heat exchanger air flowLOW MEDIUM

MEDIUM HIGH

HIGH HIGH

Tab. 12

Optional functions

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

8� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

E2 . Outdoor humidity sensor (Econofresh).Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinletbycontrollingtheairhumidity,openingorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.


Setting condition Humidity sensor Description00 Notavailable Thehumiditysensorisnotavailable.

01 Available Thehumiditysensorisavailable.

Tab. 13

NOTE

If a "HIGH" air flow is set using the remote control, the total heat exchanger air flow will also be "HIGH”, even when the user needs to adjust this function.

E . Previous cooling/heating periods (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtodelaythestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.

Thesettingconditionandthedelayperiodareshownbelow.

Setting condition Start-up delay period00 0minutes

01 30minutes

02 60minutes

Tab. 14

E .Gas sensor (Econofresh)Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinlet,controllingthelackofoxygenandanyexcessiveCO2build-upbyopeningorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.


Setting condition Gas sensor Condition00 Notavailable Thegassensorinletisnotavailable.



Tab. 15

f . OFF timer automatic settingThisfunctionisusedtoruntheOFFtimeroftheindoorunits.

Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Nodisconnection.

01~24 AvailableThereisadisconnectionafter1to24hoursofoperation.Thenumberofthesettingconditionwillbetheamountofhoursafterwhichthedisconnectionwillbecarriedout.

Tab. 16

f2 . Setting remote control as Primary or SecondaryThisfunctionisusedtosettworemotecontrolsconnectedtooneindoorunit:oneasPrimaryandtheotherasSecondary

Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Theremotecontrolissetasprimary.

02 Available Theremotecontrolissetassecondary.

Tab. 17


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

87PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


2.2.6.1. Abnormal transmission between the remote control and indoor unit

Inthiscase,theLEDrunindicatorlocatedatthebottomleftofthescreenwillflashevery2seconds.


Before analysing these problems, the system must be switched off at the mains.

Problem Cause Check point Action

Disconnectionorinadequatecontactoftheremotecontrolcable.

Cablingproblem Checkthecableandtheconnections. Repairorconnectthecable.

Remotecontrolfault. DifferentcausesCheckremotecontrolusing

theself-checkmode*1.Replacetheremotecontrol,iffaulty.

PCBfault(ontheindoorunitandremotecontrol).

WiredisconnectedfromPCB

Checkconnectors. Connectwirescorrectly.

PCBfault CheckPCBusingtheself-checkmode*2. ChangethePCB,iffaulty.

Tab. 18

*1: Consult section 2.2.6.�. II*2: Consult section 2.2.6.�. I

2.2.6.2. Troubleshooting procedure for units connected to the remote control

Possible causes:

- The remote control cable is broken.- Remote control cable contact failure.- Remote control plate failure.- If the LED run indicator flashes 5 times for 5 seconds, the display will show the unit number and alarm code (see Fig. 9

and Fig. 10).- Note down the code (see Tab. 1�) and request assistance from your distributor.

Unitnumber Alarmcode Modelcode

Refrigerantcyclenumber Numberofunitsconnected

Fig. 9

Model number

Indication Model

H Heatpump

P Inverter

F Multiple

C Coolingonly

E Other

IVX,individual

operation

L KPI

Tab. 19


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

88 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Code No.


01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.

0� Transmission Abnormal transmission between the indoor and the outdoor unit


0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB Fan controller transmission fault.

0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller Fan controller transmission fault.

05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.

0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit

Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or insufficient power supply wiring capacity.

07Cycle

Reduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.

08 Increased discharge gas temperature Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.

0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.11

Indoor unit sensor

Inlet air thermistor

Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor1� Freeze-protection thermistor1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21

Outdoor unit sensor

High pressure sensor


22 Outdoor air thermistor2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor2� Evaporating thermistor

2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor

2� Low pressure sensor

�0

System

System with an incorrect connection There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.

�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting Incorrect capacity code setting.

�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.

�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.

�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.

�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.

��

Pressure

Pressure rate decrease protection activation Fault with the compressor, inverter

�� Low pressure increase protection activation Overload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.

�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�� High pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51

Inverter

Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�

Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection Abnormal transmission detection circuit

57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin�� KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor

Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor

EE Inverter Compressor protection �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage

Tab. 20


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

8�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2.6.3. Troubleshooting on check mode

UsetheCHECKbuttonontheremotecontrolinthefollowingcases:1. WhentheLEDrunindicatorisflashing.2. Tomonitorthecauseoftheproblemafterasystemrestartduetoastoppagewith

RUNindicatorflashing.3. Toperformchecksduringnormaloperationorstoppage.4. Tomonitortheinletairanddischargeairtemperatures.

Fig. 10

Check modesCheckmode1: Indicatingthecurrentdata.Checkmode2: Indicatingthedatasavedimmediatelybeforethefault.

Step No. Check modes

Normalmode1

PressthebuttonCHECK

5 foratleast3seconds-Theindicationwillbedelayedsincethetransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandtheindoorunittakesaround

10seconds.-Alldatamaybedisplayedas“FF”,“-1”or“255”.Thesetemporaryvaluesgeneratedbythesoftwaredonotaffectthe

functionsofthedeviceatall.(Thealarmcodemayalsobedisplayedas“FF”).

2 Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed

Alarmcodeidentifyingthelastfaultthatoccurredontheindicatedunit.Numberoftheconnectedunitoroftheunitforwhichthecheckmodewaspreviouslyset.

ADDS:Numberoftheindoorunitofcycleno.**RN:No.**Refrigerantcycleno.**

3 Forthenext7seconds. 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�0 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Checkmode14 After7seconds

Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.


5 PressandholdthebuttonCHECK

5 foratleast3secondstoentercheckmode2

Ifwecontinueincheckmode1,steps6and7arearepetitionofsteps2and3.Seenoteinpoint8.

6Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed

Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.

7After7seconds 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.

Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13

8

Notefrompoint5.

NOTE

From check mode 1, the user may only enter check mode 2 - the check mode cannot be switched off

Checkmode29 Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.


-Incheckmode2,theusercanaccessdatafromthefirstthreeunitsconnectedinsequencetoaremotecontrol.

10 CheckmodeswitchedoffPressandholdthebutton

CHECK

5 foratleast3seconds.


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�1PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

I. Content of check mode 1

Bypressing“}”consecutively,thefollowingindicationswillbedisplayed.




1 Indoorunittemperaturesetting(°C). 22

2 Indoorunitairinlettemperature(°C). 2 20

3 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperature(°C).

4 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(°C). 20

5

Remotesensortemperature(°C).-Thisisonlydisplayedwhenconnectedtoaremotesensor.

Thedisplaynormallyshows“--”.TheRPKseriescannotconnecttoaremotesensor.Theindicationistherefore“--”.

2

6 Outdoorunitambienttemperature(°C). 0

7 Indoorunitheatexchangerrefrigerantgaspipingtemperature(°C). 2

8 Outdoorunitevaporatingtemperatureduringheating(°C). 8 02

9Controlinformation.-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.

FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning. --

10

Dischargegasrefrigeranttemperatureintopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis

given.-Ifthetemperatureexceeds126°C,theindicationwillread“126”.

A

11 Remotecontrolthermostattemperature. 2

NOTE






orShort-circuit in any thermistor except 2




PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�2 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Microcomputer input/output indication

12 Indoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C Z

HeatThermostaton

ColdThermostaton

Alarm

Operation

YH2

Y52H

Dark

13 Outdoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C2 -

Y211

Y212

Y52C1Y52C2

Y20B

Y20A

DarkFanON

PCBrelay PartnameYH2 Relayfordrainpump(MD)and/ordewheater(EHW).Y52H Relayforelectricheater(CEH).Y211

4-wayvalverelay.Y212

Y52C1Compressorrelay.

Y52C2Y20A

Solenoidvalverelay.Y20B

Tab. 21

Symbols with the letter Y are relays on the indoor/outdoor unit PCB plate.


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Unit stoppage cause indication

14 Causeofthestoppage. d 0

Codes:

00 Operationstopped,powerswitchedoff.

0 Thermostatswitchedoff(seebottomsectionpoint1).

02 Alarm(seebottomnotesectionpoint2).

0 Freezeprotection,overheatingprotection

0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheoutdoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point3)).

0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheindoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point4)).

0Coolingprocessstoppedduetoalowoutdoortemperature,heatingprocessstoppedduetoahighoutdoortemperature.

08 Compressorquantitychangeover,stoppage.

0 4-wayvalvechangeoverstoppagerequest(FXonly).

0 Stoppagerequest,forcedstoppage.

Retryduepressureratereduction.

2 Retryduetoincreasedlowpressure.

Retrydueincreasedhighpressure.

Retryduetoabnormalcurrentintheconstantspeedcompressor.

Retryduetoabnormalhightemperatureofthedischargegas,excessivelylowsuctionpressure.

Retryduetoreducedoverheatingofthedischargegas.

Retryduetoinverterdisconnection.

8 Retryduetovoltagereduction.

Expansionvalveopeningchangeprotection.

20 Indoorunitoperationmodechangeover(seebottomnotesectionpoint5).

2 Forcedthermostatdeactivationwhendeactivatedonanotherindoorunit.

22 Hot-startafter4hourswithoutdooruniton.

2 Thermostatoffduringenergy-savingmode.

Tab. 22

NOTE

1. Explanation of terms: Thermostat on: A condition where the indoor unit requests compressor activation.Thermostat off: A condition where the indoor unit does not request compressor activation.2. Although the stoppage is caused by an "alarm", it does not always indicate "02".

3. If the transmission between the control printed circuit boards of the inverter and the control is not made within 30 seconds, a stoppage will occur due to cause d1-05 and alarm code "04" may be displayed.

4. If the transmission between the indoor and outdoor units is not made within 3 minutes, the indoor units will stop. In this case, the stoppage is due to cause d1-06 and alarm code "03" may be displayed.5. The FSN system will read 20 when different modes are selected for indoor units.


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Abnormal operation occurrence counter

15 Abnormaloperationoccurrencecounter E 0

16 Indoorunitinstantaneouspowerfailureoccurrencecounter. E2 00

17 Remotecontroltoindoorunittransmissionerroroccurrencecounter. E 00

18 Abnormalinverteroperationoccurrencecounter. E 00

- Counts up to ��.- For counts above "��”, it will always read "��".

NOTE

- If a transmission error lasts for more than 3 minutes, one occurrence is added to the counter. - Stored data can be deleted by following the instructions given in section 2.2.6.4. "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote

control".

Step No. Indication of automatic swing louver status

19 Swinglouversensor. F 00

- 00 : Normal - FF : Abnormal


20 Dischargepressure(high)(x0.1MPa). H 8

21 Suctionpressure(low)(x0.01MPa). H2 0

22Controlinformation:Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. H

23Operatingfrequency(Hz):Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. H


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�5PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Step No. Indoor unit capacity indication

24 Indoorunitcapacity. J 08

Theindoorunitcapacityisindicatedasshowninthefollowingtable:

Indoor unit capacity code

IndicationcodeEquivalentcapacity

in(CV)

06 0,8

08 1

10 1,3

13 1,5

14 1,8

16 2

18 2,3

20 2,5

22 2,8

26 3/3,5

32 4

40 5

48 6

64 8

80 10

Tab. 23

25

Outdoor unit code: “n” indicates the total number of indoor units.

J2 Fnn = ~ , , A, , C, d, E, F, U(10) (11) (12) (1�) (1�) (15) (1�)

26Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J3:01~16(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),decimal

indication:J 0

27Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J4:00~0F(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),hexadecimal

indication(16numbers)J 00


28 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. L 20

29 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. L2

30OutdoorunitMV2expansionvalveopening.-Formodelswithnoexpansionvalve,thesamevaluewillappearonbothMV2andMV1 L

31OutdoorunitMVBexpansionvalveopening.-FXNonly. L 00


�2Compressorcurrent.-Thetotalcurrentisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce.

Fortheinvertercompressor,theoperatingcurrentfromtheprimarysideoftheinverterisindicated.P 2

�� Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

II. Content of check mode 2

Whenmorethanthreeindoorunitsareconnectedtooneremotecontrol,onlythemostrecentdatafromthethreefirstindoorunitsconnectedinsequencewillbeshown.Pressing“}”ontheTEMPbuttontakesyoutothenextscreen,whilepressing“~”onthesamebuttontakesyoutothepreviousscreen.




1 Indoorunitairinlettemperatureinthethermistor(°C). 2

2 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperatureinthermistor(°C). 2 0

3 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(freezeprotection)(°C). 2

4 Outdoortemperature(°C). 2

5 Indoorunitheatexchangergaspipingtemperature(°C). 2

6 Evaporatingtemperatureinheatingmode(°C). 0

7Controlinformation-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. --

8Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-Whentwocomponentsarerunningsimultaneously,theaveragetemperatureisgiven. 8

NOTE






orShort-circuit in any thermistor except 2




PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�7PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


9Controlinformation-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.-FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning.

8

10Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis

given.

A 0

11Remotecontrolthermostattemperature-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.-Ithasnospecificmeaning.

12Operatingfrequency(Hz)-Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. C

Step No. Indication of the expansion opening

13 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. d 20

14 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. E


15Compressor operating current-Thetotalvalueisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. F 20


2.2.6.4. Checking procedure for each main component

PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control

Use the following troubleshooting procedure to check the PCB in both indoor and outdoor units.Step No. Action required Image

1 StopthemachinebypressingtheRun/Stopbutton. PressRUN/STOP

2PCBcheckmode:Press and hold both buttons for � seconds.

TEMP CHECK} 5

3Indicationofthenumberoftheoutdoorunit(RN)andindoorunit(ADDS)towhichtheremotecontrolisconnected.

e.g.:Indicationofunitno. “0”

4After7seconds:AutomaticPCBoperationcheck.



PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

�8 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



5After5seconds(maximum30sintheeventofatransmissionfailurebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits):Thedisplaywillindicateamaximumof3typesofFAULTS.

Types of abnormal condition

Abnormaloperationcondition(1)



Codes:

Indication Condition

00 Normal

Abnormalcondition(opencircuit,short-circuit,etc.)onacircuitfor:

0 Airinlettemperaturethermistor

Indoor unit PCB

02 Dischargeairtemperaturethermistor


0 Abnormalremotethermistor


0 Remotesensor

08 Transmissionfromcentralstation

0A EEPROM

0 Zero-crossinputfault

EE Transmissionfromindoorunitsduringcheck

0 Transmissionfromoutdoorunit

Outdoor unit PCB

F Faninletinternalthermostatfault

F PSWinputfault

F PSHprotectionsignaldetectioncircuit

F Phasedetection

F8 Transmissionfrominverter

FA Highpressuresensor

F Dischargegastemperaturethermistorofthecompressor

FC Lowpressuresensor

Fd Heatexchangerevaporationtemperaturethermistor

FF Ambientairtemperaturethermistor

Tab. 24



PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



6 Pressbutton

7 Ifthereisanotherunit.Nextunitself-checkindication.TEMP} ~

8 e.g.:Indicationofunitn°“2”.

9 After7seconds.

10From1to5seconds.

11 After1second. t J3 t J4 t J2 t

12 Pressbutton SwitchoffPCBcheckmode

NOTE

- If this condition persists and alarm code “J1” is not displayed, this means that none of the indoor units have been connected to the remote control. Check the wiring between the remote control and the indoor unit.

- During this troubleshooting procedure, the following PCB parts cannot be checked. - Indoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit, ventilation circuit, protection circuit - Outdoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit.- If this system troubleshooting procedure is run through the central station, the central station indication may change during the

procedure. Please note that this is normal.- After this troubleshooting procedure is complete, the memory of the meter storing the abnormal conditions described above will be

erased.

Tocarryoutthepreviouscheckusingawirelessremotecontrolwithareceiverbuiltintoanindoorwalltypeunit,usethefollowingprocedure:

1. Switch off the power source.2. Disconnect connector (CN25) on PWB(M).�. Connect the PC-P2HTE.�. Switch on the power.

Oncecheckiscomplete,switchoffthepowersourceagainandreconnecttheconnectorsastheywerebeforethecheck.


PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

100 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.2.6.5. Remote control self-checking procedure

WhentousetheOKbutton:1.Whentheremotecontroldisplaysanoperatingfault.2.Forperiodicmaintenancechecks.


1 Switchonthepowersource.

2Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.(Thebuttonsmaybepressedwhenthesystemisrunning)

TEMP MODE

} ~ 5

3

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.


1

âFor 1 second

2

âFor 1 second

�

âFor 1 second

�

âFor 1 second

5

âFor � seconds


TEMP MODE

} ~ 5Goto 11

4 OncetheLCDscreenhaschanged,theRUNindicatorwillflashtwice. 01

5

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Pressallbuttons(13),oneatatime.Eachtimethebuttonispressed,theindicationnumbershowninpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagramwillincreasebyone.-Thecheckcannotproceedtothenextstepuntilallthebuttonsarepressed.

0002

NOTE

The buttons may be pressed in any order.If two or more switches are pressed at once, the action is not valid and is therefore not registered.



PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

101PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



6

TheLCDwillchange,asshownbelow:Theremotecontrolwillbegintocheckthetransmissioncircuitautomatically.-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononthetransmissioncircuit,theLCDscreenwill

remainasshowninthediagramontheright,andthecheckwillnotproceedtothenextstep.

03

7

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow:Thetemperaturedetectedbytheremotecontrolthermostatisindicatedinpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagram:

2004

NOTE

If the “--” or “FF” indicators are displayed in part “A”, the remote control thermostat is faulty.

8

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow. 05

IftheRESETbuttonispressedornobuttonsarepressedfor15seconds,alldataintheremotecontrolEEPROMmemorywillbeerased.Atthispoint,thenumberisindicatedinpart(A)asshownbelow.Whenthenumber“”appears,theEEPROMmemoryisfaulty.Ifthenumberindicatedinpart(A)is“”,thecheckwillnotproceedtothenextcomponent.

0005

9TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Afterafewseconds,theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically. 06

10ErasingtheEEPROMmemory(fromstepNo.3).TheLCDscreenwillchangeasshownbelow,andtheremotecontrolwillerasetheEEPROMmemoryautomatically.

07

11Afterafewseconds,theLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically.Inthiscase,thesystemwillnotstarttorunautomatically.

08

Remote control optional accessories

PC-P1HE

Technical catalogue

102 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008




During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.

For more information on this cable, see the following table:




Remotecontrolside

A B

Cablecolour

Black White

PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC









300mm(aprox.)

Tab. 26

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.3. PC-P5H1E..............................................................................................105

2.3.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................105



2.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................106

2.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1062.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1072.3.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1072.3.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1072.3.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................108


2.3.4.1Standardelectricalconnection...........................................................................1102.3.4.2Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1102.3.4.3.Testingprocedure...............................................................................................111

2.3.5. Operation................................................................................................113





Table of contents

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

10�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

General details

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

10� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.3. PC-P5H1E




- Smaller remote control than conventional models.

- Easy to use, making it perfect for installations such as hotels where it will be used by numerous different people.

- Its main function is to set the temperature.

- The unit can be used with 2 remote controls or with a group remote (for a maximum of 1� units) in the same way as a conventional remote control is used.


This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.


Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H1E PC-RLH8(RCI)

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1



RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E

RPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E

RPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R

RPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E

RPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E



RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei

RPF-FSG2Ei

RPFI-FSG2Ei

Tab. 2



Whenaproblemoccurs,analarmcodewillimmediatelybedisplayedwithdetailedinformationabouttheerror.

General details

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

105PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


120

70 10

15

Fig. 1

2.3.3. Installation




and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your

HITACHI service provider.

$ CAUTION




Dimension and installation details Installation

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

10� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008





Tab. 3

NOTE



Ifseveralcontrolunitsaretobeinstalledinaverticalposition,leaveadistanceofatleast50mmbetweenthemtoallowthefrontcovertobeopenedandtoinsertthetoolforremovingthecontrolfromitshousing.

Fig. 2


NOTE

Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.- Otherwise, contact

the manufacturer.

Check the content and the number of accessories in the package.


Remotecontrol

1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation




Cable(20cm) 1

Tab. 4

Dimension and installation details Installation

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

107PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


1.Inserttheendofthescrewdriverintotheindentsonthebottomofthebracket,pushandrotatethescrewdrivertoremovetheremotefromthebracket.Unscrewthebasetoreleasethebracket

Fig. 3

2.Cableconnection.Connectandsoldertheaccessorycabletothecablesuppliedwiththeunit.Insulatethecontactareawithvinyltape.

Fieldsupplycable Accessorycable

Connectionpart

Fig. 4

3.Chooseoneofthefollowinginstallationoptionsforsecuringtheremotecontrol,dependingontheinstallationrequirements:- With remote control cable exposed.- Using an electrical box.- With a bedside table.


Securethecableholderaccessorytothewallusing2M4screws(accessories).

Fig. 5


Therearedifferenttypesofelectricalboxesavailableonthemarketthatcanbeusedforthisinstallation,forexample:

- Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.) - Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box

1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethe

necessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightoftheterminalsAandB.

ScrewsM4(fieldsupply)

Box

Fig. 6

Installation Installation

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

108 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

III. If using a bedside table

Cutaholetoleavetheremotecontrolexposedandpreparethebolts(over140mm),asshowninthediagram.

NOTE

The bolts must be positioned in-line with the spacers (field supply).

Bolt

Fig. 7

Fittheboltsintothefixingbracketandsecurethespacerswithnuts.-Bolt(fieldsupply).-Nut(fieldsupply).-Spacer(fieldsupply).

NOTE

Leave a distance of at least 30mm between the spacer holes.

Bolt(fieldsupply)

Nut(fieldsupply)

Spacer(fieldsupply)

Fig. 8

Removethedecorativecoverandplacetheremotecontrolintheholeforinstallation.

Nut(fieldsupply)

Fig. 9

4.Securetheremotetothebracketusingthescrewsandconnectthecableasshowninthediagram.

Inserttheconnector

Passthecablethroughthehople

Fig. 10

5.Securetheremotetothefixingbracket.Firstconnectthetop,andthenthebottom.

Fig. 11

Installation Installation

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

10�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.3.4. Electrical connection

2.3.4.1 Standard electrical connection

$ CAUTION


- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in the diagram, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.



Cabletie

Ringcore

Wiringremotecontrol

Fig. 12

This diagram shows an example of a conventional connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.

2.3.4.2 Electrical connection for several units

Thisremotecontrolcancontroluptoamaximumof16units.Ifthissettingischanged,thewiringconnectionandothernecessarytasksmustbecarriedout,asshownbelow.Tworemotecontrolscanbeconnectedtothesameunitorgroupofunits.Thesecondisasecondaryremotecontrol,asshownbelow.Seesection"2.3.6.Optionalfunctions"formoreinformation.

Terminalboard Terminalboard

ScrewsM3.5

ScrewsM3.5

CN1 CN1A AB B

Max.16indoorunits

Twistedpaircable:1P-Atleast0,75mm2

Fig. 13

$ CAUTION

- Use a 0.3 - 0.75 mm2 cable (maximum total cable length: 30m). If the total cable length exceeds 30m, use a twisted pair cable (1P - 0.75mm2) (maximum total cable length: 200 m). If using the remote control timer, the maximum total cable length is 100m. The use of other cables can produce noise, which may lead to a defective system operation.

- The remote control cable/indoor unit transmission cables and the power supply cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.

- If this distance is less than 30cm, install the cables in a conduit (type-D; ≤ 100 Ω) and connect one end to earth. Failure to do so may cause a fault or may cause the air conditioning unit to work incorrectly due to the noise.

- If several indoor units are controlled simultaneously, establish the addresses for the refrigerant cycle and indoor units. This is particularly important when simultaneously controlling indoor units with several refrigerant cycles since abnormal transmission may occur due to duplicate addresses.

- Do not leave any space in the remote control box cable hole. Any space must be covered using vinyl tape for example to prevent problems caused by dew or by insects entering the remote control box.

- To use two remote controls (primary and secondary), see point "2.3.6. Optional Functions".

Electrical connection Electrical connection

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

110 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

I. Field supply communication cable options.

Option 1:-Twistedpaircable,2x75mm²(maximumtotal

length200m).

Unweldedterminal(typex1.25-3X)(Sideofthe

terminalblock)

(Sideoftheremotecontrol)

Fig. 14

Option 2:-Conventionalshieldedcable,2x0.75mm²,for

connectingtheearthshieldingonthesideoftheelectricbox(maximumtotallength200m).

(Sideoftheterminalblock)

(Sideoftheremotecontrol)

Fig. 15

II. Optional accessory cable.

Cables(twistedwire,2x0.75mm²)withdifferentlengthsareprovidedasanoptionalsupplyandarefittedwithconnectors.

Cable reference Cable model Length (m)7E790211 PRC-10E1 107E790212 PRC-15E1 157E790213 PRC-20E1 207E790214 PRC-30E1 30

Tab. 5

2.3.4.3. Testing procedure

1.Switchonthepowersupplytoallindoorunits.2.Modelswithautomaticaddressfunctionwilltakethreetofiveminutestocompletethesettings.3.Setthesystemto“TESTRUN”modefromtheoutdoorunits.

NOTE

- The PC-P5H1E does not have Test Run mode. The test run must be carried out from the outdoor unit.- It takes 3 to 5 minutes to complete the automatic address setting after the power source is switched on.- The total number of units connected is indicated on the liquid crystal display.

Example:When1indoorunitisconnected.

- If the indicated number is incorrect, then there is an abnormal condition such as such as incorrect wiring, electrical noise, etc.

- Switch off the power source and correct the wiring after checking the following points (wait at least 10 seconds before switching the power source on/off)- The indoor unit power source is not connected or the wiring is incorrect.- Incorrect connection of cable between indoor units or incorrect connection of remote control cable.- Incorrect setting of rotary switch (setting overlapped) on PCB of the indoor units.

4.Cancellingtestrunmode- Test Run mode will end automatically after 2 hours.- Test Run mode can be cancelled from the outdoor unit or by pressing the on/off button on the PC-P5H1E.

NOTE

The operation mode during the test is stored on the PC-P5H1E. Once the Test Run is complete, select the operation mode - see point "2.3.6. Optional functions".

Electrical connection Electrical connection

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

111PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.3.5. Operation

NOTE

If the LOW fan speed is selected on the indoor unit and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed of the indoor unit must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.

Description

SCHEDULEDCHECKindicator:Switchesonduringtestmode.

4

6

7

89

10

11

1

2

3

5

12

13

Fig. 16 Model:PC-ARH (E)

PC-P5H1E

AUTOCONTROLindicator:Appearswhentheoperatingconditionislimited.

Alarmcodeindicator:Appearswhenthereisanabnormalconditionintheairconditioningunit.

Operationmodeindicator:

OUNLED(green):Indicatesthattheunitisrunning.

RUN/STOPbutton:Thisbuttonisusedtostartandstopthesystem.

MODEbutton

:FAN

:COOL

:HEAT

:DRY

:AUTOBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,thesettingwillchangeinsequence:“COOL”,“FAN”,“HEAT”,“DRY”o“AUTO”.”FAN”(torestrictthechangeofoperationmodeH3:01;norestriction,H3:02).

FANSPEEDbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,thesettingwillchangeinsequence.

Swinglouver:Starttheswinglouverbypressingthisbutton.Pressitagaintostoptheswinglouver.Thelouverwillthenstopattheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ ”indicator.

TEMPbutton(temperaturesetting):Thisbuttonisusedtoestablishthesettingtemperature.

Fanspeedindicator.

Swinglouverindicator.

Temperatureindicator.

Tab. 6

Operation Optional functions

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

112 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.3.6. Optional Functions

1. Switching to optional setting mode:Pressthe“MODE”and“FANSPEED”buttonsatthesametimeforatleast3secondswhentheairconditioningunitisoff.Thescreenwillchange,asshowninthediagram,whenoptionalsettingmodeisactivated.

2. Changing options and setting elements:Press“VTEMP”tochangecertainsettingelementswhenshown.Tochangesettingoptions,pressthe“TEMP”button.Consultthefollowingtableforsettingelementsandoptions.

Pressthe“VTEMP”buttontoselectsettingelements

Pressthe“TEMP

V

”buttontochangethesettingoptions

3. Cancelling the function selection mode:Toreturntonormalmodefrom2.,pressthe"MODE"and"FANSPEED"buttonsatthesametime.

Optional setting elements

Code Element Setting

b1 Cancellingheatingtemperaturesetting 00:Normal(temperaturesetting+4°C)01:Cancelled(temperaturesetting)02:Temperaturesetting+2ºC*1

b8 Automaticcooling/heatingmode 00:Off01:On

C5 Indoorfanincrease 00:Off01:High102:High2

C8 Remotecontrolthermostat*2 00:Off01:Switchfromindoorinletthermistortoremotecontrol

thermostat02:Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorinlet

thermistorandtheremotecontrolthermostat

F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols 00:Primary00:Secondary

FC Minimumsettingforcoolingtemperature*3 00:Normaltemperaturemargin01-10:Minimumcoolinglimit+1ºC-+10ºC

Fd Maximumsettingforheatingtemperature*4 00:Normaltemperaturemargin01-10:Maximumheatinglimit-1ºC-10ºC

Tab. 7 (continued on the next page)

Operation Optional functions

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

11�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Code Element Setting

H1 Maintenancealarm 00:Show01:Hide

H2 Noautomaticcontrolindication 00:Show01:Hide

H3 Operationmodechangerestriction*5 00:Operationmodechangeoff(hideoperationmode)(factorysetting)

01:Operationmodesetbythecentralcontrolunit+"FAN"mode

02:Unlimitedoperation

H4 Ventilationchangeover(totalheatexchangeronly)

00:Airconditioningonly01:Ventilationonly02:Airconditioning+Ventilation

H5 Centralcontrolavailableafterforcedstoppage. 00:Off01:On

*1.Certainindoorunitsdonotacceptthesetting“02”.*2.Ifinstalledonabedsidetable,usethesetting“00”.*3.Appliesto“FAN”,“COOL”and“DRY”modes.*4.Appliesto“HEAT”mode.*5.“01”isonlyavailablewhenusingaremotecontrol.Donotusethissettingwhenusingtworemotecontrols

(primary/secondary).

Tab. 7

NOTE

- When connecting several indoor units, the same settings are applied to all units.- To change the settings, wait at least three minutes after switching the power on.- Some indoor and outdoor units do not accept certain settings or do not have the functions that relate to the

activated settings. Check the available settings beforehand.- Note down the option selected in the "settings" column on the table.

2.3.7. Alarm indication

TherunLED(green)willflash.TheLCDscreenwillshowthefollowinginformation:

- No. of indoor unit affected by the alarm.- Alarm code.- Unit model.- No. of indoor units connected to the system.

NOTE

For more information on alarm indications, check the installation and operation manual for the outdoor unit.

Optional functions and alarm indication Alarm indication

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

11� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Code No.


01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor, drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.

0� TransmissionAbnormal transmission between the indoor unit (or outdoor) and the outdoor unit (or indoor)





0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or

insufficient power supply wiring capacity.0�. Voltage drop Voltage drop due to an excessively low or high voltage in the ventilation unit inverter

07Cycle

Reduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.


0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.11

Indoor unit sensor


Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor

1� Freeze-protection thermistor

1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21

Outdoor unit sensor






�0

System



�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit


�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.




��

Pressure


�� Low pressure increase protection activationOverload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.

�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51

Inverter

Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage

5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)

5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�


57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin�� KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor


Tab. 8

Optional functions and alarm indication Alarm indication

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

115PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H1E and PC-RLH8/�/11






Remotecontrolside

A BCable colour Black White

PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC




This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.

A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.





300mm(approx.)

Tab. 10

PC-P5H1E

Technical catalogue

11� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

117PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.4. PC-P5H..................................................................................................119

2.4.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................119



2.4.3. Installation..............................................................................................120

2.4.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1202.4.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1212.4.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1212.4.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................122


2.4.4.1.Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1232.4.4.2.Checkingprocedure...........................................................................................125

2.4.5. Operation................................................................................................126

2.4.5.1.Description........................................................................................................1262.4.5.2.Start....................................................................................................................1262.4.5.3.Stop....................................................................................................................126





PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

118 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

11�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.4. PC-P5H




- Smaller remote control than conventional models.

- Easy to use, making it perfect for installations such as hotels where it will be used by numerous different people.

- Its main function is to set the temperature.

- The unit can be used with 2 remote controls or with a group remote (for a maximum of 1� units) in the same way as a conventional remote control is used.


This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.


Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H PC-RLH8(RCI)

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1



RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E

RPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E

RPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R

RPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E

RPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E



RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei

RPF-FSG2Ei

RPFI-FSG2Ei

Tab. 2



Whenaproblemoccurs,analarmcodewillimmediatelybedisplayedwithdetailedinformationabouttheerror.

General details

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

120 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Fig. 1

2.4.3. Installation






$ CAUTION




Dimension and installation details

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

121PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008





Tab. 3

NOTE




��

��

Atleast50mm

Fig. 2

2.4.3.4. Supply contentPrior to installation

NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4).- All components are in perfect condition.- Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.







Cable(20cm) 1

Tab. 4

Installation

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

122 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


1.Inserttheendofthescrewdriverintotheindentsonthebottomofthebracket,pushandrotatethescrewdrivertoremovetheremotefromthebracket.

��

Approx. �mm

Flat-head screwdriverIndent part

Fig. 3

2.Cableconnection.Connectandsoldertheaccessorycabletothecablesuppliedwiththeunit.

Accessory cable

(Insulate the contact area with vinyl tape)

Field supply cable

Fig. 4

3.Securetheremotetothebracketandconnectthecableasillustratedbelow.


Fixthebrackettothewallusingthescrews(accessories)

Insertthecablethroughtheremotecontrolupperhole

Inserttheconnectorintotheterminal

Fig. 5


There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.)

- Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessary

lengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.

Screws(M4)(fieldsupply)

Box

Fig. 6

4.Securetheremotetothebracket.Firstconnectthetop,andthentothebottom.

Installation

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

12�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.4.4. Electrical connection

$ CAUTION


- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in the diagram, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.

- If the cable measures 0.75 mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.


Remotecontrol

Cabletie

Connectorcord

Ringcore

This diagram shows an example of a conventional connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.

Fig. 7

2.4.4.1. Electrical connection for several units

Thisremotecontrolcancontroluptoamaximumof16units.Ifthissettingischanged,thewiringconnectionandothernecessarytasksmustbecarriedout,asshownbelow.Tworemotecontrolscanbeconnectedtothesameunitorgroupofunits.Thesecondisasecondaryremotecontrol,asshownbelow.Seesection"2.4.6.Optionalfunctions"formoreinformation.

Remotecontrol

Electricalboxoftheindoorunit

Terminalboard

M3.5screws

Terminalboard

M3.5screws

PC-P1HEremotecontrol(secondary)

Twisted,shieldedpaircable


Fig. 8

Electrical connection

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

12� PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

-Useatwistedpaircable,2x0.75mm²(maximumtotallength200m).

Twistedpaircable:(2x0,75mm²)

Terminalwithoutwelding(1.25-3Xtype)

Terminalblockside Remotecontrolside

10050

Fig. 9

-Youcanalsousaconventionalshieldedcable,2x0.75mm²,forconnectingtheearthshieldingonthesideoftheelectricbox(maximumtotallength200m).

Conventionalshieldedcable:(2x0,75mm2) Terminalwithoutwelding(1.25-3Xtype)

(Terminalblockside) (Remotecontrolside)

Fig. 10

Optional accessory cable.

Cables(twistedwire,2x0.75mm²)withdifferentlengthsareprovidedasanoptionalsupplyandarefittedwithconnectors.

Cable reference Cable model Length (m)7E790211 PRC-10E1 107E790212 PRC-15E1 157E790213 PRC-20E1 207E790214 PRC-30E1 30

Tab. 5

$ CAUTION

- Use a twisted pair cable (shielded) (2 x 0.75²) as a transmission cable to avoid any operating errors (maximum total cable length 200m). If the total cable length does not exceed 30m, a different type of cable may be used (at least 0.3 mm²).

- The remote control cable and the power supply cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.- If several indoor units are being controlled simultaneously, establish the refrigerant cycle number and the address

of the indoor units as indicated below.


PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

125PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Addressoftheindoorunits:

Mainunit Unit1 Unit2 Unit3 Unit8 Unit9 Unit10 Unit11

Unit4 Unit5 Unit6 Unit7 Unit12 Unit13 Unit14 Unit15

Fig. 11

2.4.4.2. Checking procedure

1Switchonthepowersupplytoallindoorunits.2.Setthesystemto“TESTRUN”modefromtheoutdoorunit.

NOTE

- The PC-P5H does not have Test Run mode. The test run must be carried out from the outdoor unit.- It takes 3 to 5 minutes to complete the automatic address setting after the power source is switched on.- The total number of units connected is indicated on the liquid crystal display.

05 unitExample:When5indoorunitsareconnected.

- If the indicated number is incorrect, then there is an abnormal condition such as such as incorrect wiring, electrical noise, etc.

- Switch off the power source and correct the wiring after checking the following points (wait at least 10 seconds before switching the power source on/off)- The indoor unit power source is not connected or the wiring is incorrect.- Incorrect connection of cable between indoor units or incorrect connection of remote control cable.- Incorrect setting of rotary switch (setting overlapped) on PCB of the indoor units.

3.Cancellingtestrunmode- Test Run mode will end automatically after 2 hours.- Test Run mode can be cancelled from the outdoor unit or by pressing the on/off button on the PC-P5H.

NOTE

The operation mode during the test is stored on the PC-P5H. Once the Test Run is complete, select the operation mode as indicated in the Mode setting section of chapter 2.4.6. Optional functions.


PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

12� PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.4.5. Operation

NOTE

If the LOW fan speed is selected on the indoor unit and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed of the indoor unit must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.


RUN/STOPbutton

Temperaturesettingbutton

FANSPEEDbutton:Lowspeed(LOW)

FANSPEEDbutton:Mediumspeed(MEDIUM)

FANSPEEDbutton:Highspeed(HIGH)

FANSPEED(green)

Temperatureindication

RunLED(red)

Tab. 6

Fig. 12 Model: PC-P5H

2.4.5.2. Start

1.Thestart-upprocesswillbeginwhentheindoorunitisswitchedon.ºC

Fig. 13

2.Setthedesiredtemperaturebypressing.Thetemperaturesettingisdisplayedonthescreen.

3.Selectafanspeedbypressingoneofthefollowingbuttons:,,.Theselectedspeedisindicatedbythegreen

LED.

4.Pressthebutton.TheredLEDwillswitchon.

2.4.5.3. Stop

1.Pressthe.TheairconditioningunitwillstopandallLEDindicatorswillswitchoff.Torestarttheunit,press.

NOTE

- This remote control cannot be used to set the swing louver; this setting must be selected from the central station or with a different remote control.

- This remote control is preconfigured with an auto-swing louver setting.- This remote control can be locked using a central control. Once it is locked, none of the parameters can be

changed.

Operation

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

127PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.4.6. Optional Functions

Step No.

Operation mode

1- Withtheunitsetonoperationmode(butwiththeunitnotrunning)

2- Switchtofunctionsettingmode.

Todothis,press( )( )and( )simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds

3- Modesetting Pressandselectanoperationmode:

OperationmodeModeNo.

˚C

Temp.

Temp.

Operation mode:A:automaticF:fanC:coolingd:dehumidifyingH:heating

-Setto"Automatic"innormalconditions.

-Iftheremotecontrolissettounavailablefromthecentralstation,themodesettingfunctionwillnotbeavailable.

4- Press( ).

Cancellingtheheatingtemperaturesetting.

AdjustmentModeNo.2

˚CPressandselectanoperationmode:

Setting:0:standard:cancellation

-Iftheindoorunitsaresetto"Standard"and"Cancellation",theindicationwillbe"-"whenispressed;allindoorunitscanbesetto“0”or“”.

5- Press( )twice.Simultaneousoperationsetting(onlyformodelswithtotalheatexchanger*).(*Totalheatexchanger:Whenadjustingthetemperature,theindoorunitwillreleaseairfrominsidetheroomandreplaceitwithairfromoutside.Toadjusttheairfromoutsidetothetemperaturesettinginsidetheroom,itispassedthroughthetotalheatexchanger.Theairpre-treated(pre-conditioned)inthisheatexchangerisroutedtotheindoorunitwhereitisconditionedandthencirculatedintotheroom.

AdjustmentModeNo.

˚C

Pressandselectanoperationmode:

Temp.

Temp.

Setting:0:airconditioning:ventilationI2:airconditioning+ventilationI

6- Press( ).

Primaryandsecondaryremotecontrolsetting.

AdjustmentModeNo.

˚CPressandselectanoperationmode:

Setting:0:primary:secondary

-Whenthissettingischanged,switchoffthepowersourcetoallindoorunitsafterreturningtooperationmode.

7- Gobacktostep1:Press( )( )and( )simultaneously.

Optional functions

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

128 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.4.7. Alarm indication

TherunLED(red)willflash.Pressandholdthetwotemperaturebuttonsfor3secondsandthenumberofthefirstindoorunittestedwillappear.Pressingthetemperaturebuttonswillswitchbetweenselectedunitsandthenindicatesthealarmcode(seeTab.77),asshownbelow.

1-

˚C

Refrigerantcyclenumber

Indoorunitnumber

After1sec. Model number Model

H UTOPIA

P UTOPIAINVERTER

F SET-FREE

Tab. 7

2-

˚C

Modelcode

Numberofunitsconnected(A~Gindicates10~16)

After1sec.

3-

˚C

Alarmcode After1sec.Gobacktostep1


Code No.


01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor, drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.

0� TransmissionAbnormal transmission between the indoor unit (or outdoor) and the outdoor unit (or indoor)





0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or

insufficient power supply wiring capacity.0�. Voltage drop Voltage drop due to an excessively low or high

voltage in the ventilation unit inverter07

CycleReduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.


0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.

Tab. 8 (continued on the next page)

Alarm indication

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

12�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


Code No.


11

Indoor unit sensor


Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor1� Freeze-protection thermistor1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21

Outdoor unit sensor






�0

System



�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit


�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.




��

Pressure


�� Low pressure increase protection activationOverload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.

�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51

Inverter

Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage

5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)

5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�


57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin��

KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor


Tab. 8

Alarm indication

PC-P5H

Technical catalogue

1�0 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008







PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmbeigecolour

(twistedandshielded2cable) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)Indoorunit

PCBsideRemotecontrol

side


PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC










300mm(approx.)

Tab. 10


1��PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.5. WirelessRemoteControl........................................................................135

2.5.1. GeneraldetailsI.Selectionadvantages..................................................135


2.5.3. Installation..............................................................................................136

2.5.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................1362.5.3.2.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1372.5.3.3.Batterycharging.................................................................................................1372.5.3.4.Receiverkit.........................................................................................................1382.5.3.5.Wallinstallation...................................................................................................139

2.5.4. Operation................................................................................................139

2.5.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1402.5.4.2.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................1412.5.4.3.Operationwithseveralindoorunits....................................................................142

2.5.5. Testmodewiththeremotecontrol..........................................................145



2.5.7. PC-RLH8receiverkitinstallation............................................................147

2.5.7.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1472.5.7.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1472.5.7.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1482.5.7.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1482.5.7.5.Optionalfunctions...............................................................................................151

2.5.8 PC-RLH9receiverkitinstallation............................................................152

2.5.8.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1522.5.8.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1522.5.8.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1532.5.8.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1532.5.8.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................155

2.5.9. PC-RLH11receiverkitinstallation..........................................................156

2.5.9.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1562.5.9.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1562.5.9.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1572.5.9.4.Installationprocedure........................................................................................1572.5.9.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................160

1�� PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents

2.5.10.PC-RLH13receiverkitinstallation...........................................................161

2.5.10.1.Safetysummary................................................................................................1612.5.10.2.Installationsiteselection...................................................................................1612.5.10.3.Supplycontent..................................................................................................1622.5.10.4.Installationprocedure.......................................................................................1622.5.10.5.Optionalfunctions.............................................................................................165

General and dimension details1�5PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5. Wireless Remote Control

2.5.1. General detailsI. Selection advantages

Wireless remote control that requires no wiring and provides simple one-touch operation.

Two or more units can be controlled simultaneously.




Individual Remote Controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H PC-RLH8(RCI)

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1


5x4.6

125

14.2

20

23.4

39.9

36.6

16.4

56.5

56

ø4.5

Fig. 1

Installation1�� PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.3. Installation






$ CAUTION




Installation1�7PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008



NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2).- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.

Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:Name Quant. Comments

Wirelessremotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation

Bracket 1 Fortheremotecontrol

AAA/1.5battery 2 Fortheremotecontrol

Screw 4 Forfixingthebrackettothewall

Tab. 2

2.5.3.3. Battery charging

Loadtheremotecontrol'sbatteries(AAA/1.5VX2)asfollows:

1. Remove the battery cover by sliding it in the direction marked by the arrow.

2. Insert the batteries (Insert the batteries according to the + and - marks).

Fig. 2

Installation1�8 PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.3.4. Receiver kit

Areceiverisrequiredinorderfortheindoorunitstoreceivethesignalwhenawirelessremotecontrolisused(PC-LH3A).

Compatiblemodels:

Model On the wall On the panel

Set-Free R407C

RCI-FSG2E

PC-RLH11

RPI-FSG2E

RPC-FSG2E

RPF-FSG2E

RPFI-FSG2E

RPK-FSG2M

RCD-FSG(1/2)

RCI-FSG2Ei

RPI-FSG2Ei

RPC-FSG2Ei

RPF-FSG2Ei

RPFI-FSG2Ei

Set-Free R410A

RCI-FSNE

PC-RLH11

PC-RLH8RPI-FSNE

RPC-FSNE

RPF-FSNE

PC-RLH9RPFI-FSNE

RPK-FSNM

RCD-FSN

PC-RLH13RCI-FSN1E

RPK-FSN1M

Utopia R407C

RCI-G7E

PC-RLH11

RPI-G7E

RPI-G7R

RPC-G7E

RPF-G7E

RPFI-G7E

RPK-G7M

Tab. 3

NOTE

If another remote control is used together with the PC-RLH8/9/11/13, one of them should be set as a secondary remote control by turning pin 1 of the SW3 to the ON position.(consult point 2.5.4.2., III. Secondary receiver kit setting for a wireless remote control)

PC-RLH8

RUN FILTER

DEF

COOLCOOL HEAT

EMERGENCY

TIMER

(Operation/stop) Cooling(Operation/stop) Heating

DIP switch

Fig. 3

PC-RLH9

RUN DEF FILTER TIMER

COOL HEATEMERGENCY

(Operation/stop) Heating

DIP switch

(Operation/stop) Cooling

Fig. 4

PC-RLH11

OPERATION

DEFROST

FILTER

TIMER

EMERGENCY

(Operation/stop) Cooling

(Operation/stop) Heating

DIP switch

Fig. 5

PC-RLH13

RUN FILTER

DEF

COOLCOOL HEAT

EMERGENCY

TIMER

(Operation/stop) Cooling(Operation/stop) Heating

DIP switch

Fig. 6

Installation1��PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.3.5. Wall installation

When the remote control is installed on the wall, ensure it is installed at least �0 cm away from the power supply cable.

Install the bracket (accessory) on the wall using the screws (accessories) and place the remote control on the bracket.

See the CAUTION note in point “2.5.�.1. Safety summary”.

NOTE

If orders are sent via the wall mounted remote, the indoor unit receiver may not receive them since the transmission between the control and receiver may be problematic.See point 2.5.4.1. Operation procedure.

2.5.4. Operation

NOTE




Whenthecontrolisused,aimthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationasdescribedinpoint“2.5.4.2.Operationprocedure”.

NOTE

If two indoor units are installed next to each other, the orders from the remote control may be received by both units. The function to identify each particular indoor unit is not available.

Installation and Operation1�0 PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008


TransmitterPointthetransmitterattheindoorunit'sreceivertosendorders.ThetransmissionindicationwillflashontheLCDscreenwhenordersarebeingsent.

Fig. 16 Model: PC-LH3A

Features

Thisremotecontrolisusedtosendordersreferringtotheoperationmode,timersetting,etc.,totheindoorunit.Aimtheremotecontrol'stransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationtosendtheorders(viainfraredrays)totheindoorunit.Themaximumtransmissiondistanceisapproximately6metres.(Thedistanceforaneffectivetransmissionwillbelessifthetransmissionangleinrelationtothereceiverisnotvertical).

Transmissionindication

LCDindicationTheselectedtemperature,timeroperation,louverposition,operationmode,airflowmode,etc.,appearonthedisplay.Thediagramofthedisplayshownontheleftisforguidancepurposesonly.Thedisplaywillchangeduringthedifferentoperationmodes.

OnandoffbuttonUnitoperationcanbestartedorstoppedpressingthisbutton.

FanspeedbuttonPressthisbuttontoselectthefanspeed.Ifthisbuttonispressedrepeatedly,thesettingwillsequentiallychangefromHIGH,MEDandLOW.(ThefanwillworkatLOWspeedforthedryoperationmode).

ModeselectionbuttonIftheMODEbuttonispressedrepeatedly,theunitcycleswillchangeinthefollowingorder:HEAT,DRY,COOLandFAN.Toselecttheautomaticmode,pressandholdthebuttonforatleast3seconds.Ifyoupressthebuttonagain,theunitwillreturntotheFANmode.

LouveranglebuttonTheairflowangleandautomaticlouveroperationcanbesetwiththisbutton.Whenthisbuttonispressed,theanglechangesinthefollowingorder.(Inthecoolinganddryoperationmodes,steps1-5stepsandautomaticswingareavailable).

1Step 2Step 7Step AutoSwing ....

TemperaturebuttonThetemperaturecanbesetusingthisbutton.

Resetbutton(1)PressRESETtoturnoffthefilterindicatorpilotaftercleaningthefilter.(2)Iftheunitunexpectedlystopsworkingduetotheactivationoftheprotectiondevices,etc.,presstheRESETbuttontocancelthecontrolstopafterthecauseoftheabnormalconditionhasbeenresolved.

TimerbuttonsFourbuttonscontrolthetimeroperation.Thetimesettingcanbechangedbypressing“ONTIME”or“OFFTIME”,anditcanbesetagainpressingthe“SET”button.

Tab. 4

Operation1�1PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.4.2. Operation procedure

Whenthecontrolisused,aimthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationsmodeasindicatedbelow.

Theoperationordersaresentbypressingthecorrespondingoperationbuttonandpointingtheremotecontrol'stransmitterattheindoorunit'sreceiver.

1. When the orders have been sent, the ‘ ‘ indication on the remote control's LCD screen will flash once.

2. The indicator pilot (yellow) on the indoor unit's receiver area turns on for a second when the indoor unit receives an order.

The“ ”indicator(yellow)Switchesforsomeseconds

ReceiverThetransmissionsign“ ”willflashonce

Remotecontrol

Inanangleof50˚approx.(direction)

Verticallinebetweentransmitterandreceiver

Fig. 8

NOTE

- If the indicator pilot (yellow) does not turn on event though orders have been sent, then the orders have not been received by the indoor unit. In this case, send the orders again.

- The remote control transmitter should be vertical in relation to the receiver; the permitted transmission angle range is within 50º. Nevertheless, the distance for effective transmission is reduced by half when the transmission angle is 50º. It is also reduced if electronic light is used in the room.

- When two indoor units are installed next to each other, they could both receive the orders sent from the remote control. The function for identifying each particular indoor unit cannot be used.

Operation1�2 PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.4.3. Operation with several indoor units

Multipleindoorunits(max.16units)canbestartedandstoppedsimultaneouslywithjustoneremotecontrol.Onlycarrythisoperationoutwhenseveralindoorunitshavebeeninstalledinthesameroom.

NOTE

Do not carry this operation out if the different indoor units are installed in different rooms. Some indoor units may remain unchanged.

I. Remote control installation for several units

$ CAUTION

Disconnect all power supplies before carrying out operations such as wiring, rotary switch setting, etc.

Whenseveralindoorunits(amaximumof16)areoperatingsimultaneouslywithjustoneremotecontrol(wireless),applythereceiverpanelforwirelesscontroltotheunittobeactivated,andapplythestandardpanels(forwiredcontrol)totherestoftheunits.Ifyouneedtouseseveralreceiverpanelsforwirelesscontrol,amaximumof2canbeinstalled.

If2receiverpanelsareused,setthemasprimaryandsecondarypanelsbyfollowingtheproceduresindicatedbelow.

Receiver panel (primary) Standard panel Standard panel

Standard panel with (sub) or without receiver

should be standard unitsRemote control

Fig. 9

NOTE

- It is also possible to combine a remote control and a wireless control with the same group of units.- The RPK units cannot be connected at the same time as the built-in receiver. If you want to use several RPK units

simultaneously with only one remote control, the PC-RLH11 should be used.

Themaximumpermittedcablelengthsbetweenunitsshowninthefollowingtablemustbetakenintoaccount:

Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2


Tab. 5

Operation1��PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

II. Secondary receiver kit setting for remote controls

• PC-P5H:1.Pressthe( )( )and( )buttonssimultaneouslyfor

atleast3seconds.2.Press( )4timesuntilthemodenumberis“”.3.Pressthebuttontodefinethecorrectnumber,as

shownintheillustration(secondaryorprimary). 0 : Primary

: SecondaryAdjustmentMode No. 5

Fig. 10

Whenthissettingischanged,switchoffthepowersourcetoallindoorunitsafterreturningtooperationmode.

• PC-P1HE:

1.PresstheCHECKandRESETbuttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3secondstoaccesstheoptionalsettingmode.

2.Pressoranddefinetheserviceon0.3.PresstheCHECKbutton.4.Selectthef2codebypressingthe▲ or▼TIME

button.5.Pressthebuttontodefinethecorrectnumber,asshown

intheillustration(secondaryorprimary).

Adjustmen0 : Primary

: Secondary

Fig. 11

III. Secondary receiver kit setting for a wireless remote control

• PC-RLH8/9/11/13:

1.Removethebackcover.2.Setpinno.1ofDIPSW3totheONposition.

Fig. 12

Operation1�� PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

IV. Wiring procedure between indoor units

$ CAUTION

Disconnect all power supplies before carrying out operations such as wiring, rotary switch setting, etc.

1.Laythewiringbetweentheindoorunitsafterreadingthereceiverinstallationmanual.Thetotalcablelengthshouldnotexceed500metres.

References on the cables are indicated below:

PC-RLH8/9/11 PRC-10E1 PRC-15E1 PRC-20E1 PRC-30E1

Cablelength 10m 15m 20m 30m

2.Fixtheconnectioncontrolcablebetweentheindoorunitsatcertainpointswithflexibleflangesensuringthatitdoesnotruninparallelwiththepowersupplycableinsidetheindoorunit.Keepadistanceofmorethan30cmbetweenthecontrolcableandthepowersupplycable.Earthoneendoftheconduitafterinsertingthecontrolcableinsidethemetalconduit.

3.Fittherotaryswitches(RSW)ontheprintedcircuitboardsofeachindoorunit'selectricalboxasshowninthefigureontheright.

4.Checkthenumberofindoorunitsconnectedusingtestmode.

NOTE

The 7-segment display of the receiver and remote control will show the number of indoor units connected when the operation test is carried out with the remote control. However, this number cannot be indicated on some models. In these cases, check the number with the wired control PC-P1HE.

Rotaryswitch

Receiver

Fig. 13

RSW settingUnitNo.1 UnitNo.2 UnitNo.3 UnitNo.4

UnitNo.5 UnitNo.6 UnitNo.7 UnitNo.8



Tab. 6

Operation1�5PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

2.5.5. Test mode with the remote control

NOTE

When several units are operating simultaneously (SET-FREE and UTOPIA series), and a wired control is being used, the test mode can not be carried out using the remote control. In these cases, carry out the test mode with the wired control.

1.Selectthetestmodewhentheinstallationworkiscomplete.a.Installthebatteriesfortheremotecontrol.b.Connectthepowersupplytoindoorandoutdoorunits.c.The‘ ‘pilotlight(yellow)ontheindoorunit'sreceiverwillflash(0.25secondsON⇔0.25secondsOFF)andthen

turnoff.Whenthepilotlightisflashing,theunitwillnotoperatebecauseitisstartingup.

2.Setthetestmodebypressingthe‘SET’buttonandthen‘OFFTIME’.TheLCDshouldappearlikethefigureontheright.

Thetestmodeisinstand-by

3.Settheoperationmodebypressingthe‘MODE’button. Thetestmodeoperating

4.Startthetestmodebypointingthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressingtheRUN/STOPbutton.Whentheindoorunitreceivesorders,the‘ ‘pilot(yellow)ofthereceiverwillbrieflylightup.Checkthattheordersarehavebeencorrectlyreceivedandthattheselectedmode,point3,iscorrectlyset.Intestmode,thereceiver'sredpilot(RUN)isonandthegreenpilot(TIMER)isflashing(0.5secondsON⇔0.5secondsOFF)(*seethenotebelow).ThensetthetimertoOFFfor2hours.

NOTE

1. If the ‘ ‘ pilot (yellow) does not turn on, the receiver may not have received the orders. Send the orders again.2. (*) On the RPK model, the ‘TIMER’ pilot is off.

5.Settheairlouverangleasfollows:Thelouverhasamechanismfortheautomaticswingfunction.Donotmovethelouvermanually.

a.SelecttheFANmodebypressingthe‘MODE’button.b.Setthelouveranglebypressingthe‘LOUVER’button.

6.Endingthetestmode.a.Thetestmodestopsautomaticallyafter2hours.b.Thetestmodecanbeendedbypressingthe‘RUN/STOP’buttonagain.Whentestmodehasended,checkthatthe

redpilot(RUN)andgreenpilot(TIMER)haveturnedoff.

Remote control optional accesories1�� PC - LH�A

PC - LH�A

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008









Remotecontrolside


PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC






PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsofthe

outdoorunitPCBJSTXARP-3connector

Ifalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).

(JSTXARP-3)connector

300mm(approx.)

Tab. 8

1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH8

PC - RLH8

Technical catalogue

PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation

2.5.7. PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation






$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.






Tab. 1

1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH8

PC-RLH8

Technical catalogue




NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - Todos los componentes están en perfecto estado. En caso contrario, contactar con el fabricante.



Receiverkit 1 Withconnectionwire

Connectioncable 3 Withconnectionwire

Flexiblecabletie 1 Forsecuringthecables

Cover 1 Toprotecttheconnectioncable

Tab. 2


Standard wiring

$ CAUTION

Follow these installation procedures carefully. Failure to do so may cause the receiver to become detached from the panel causing a serious accident.

1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.

2.Ifthewirelessreceiverkitisinstalledaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunitandremovetheairpanel.

3.Thisreceiverkitcanbeinstalledinpositions1,2,3or4.

Airpanel

Fig. 1

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH8

PC - RLH8

Technical catalogue


4.Removethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletotheterminalplate(white)asshownbelow.

PCB

Connectioncable

Terminalplate(white) Electricalboxof

theindoorunit

Cabletie“B”

Cabletie“A”Cover

Fig. 2

5.Drawtheconnectioncablethroughthewiringholeontheindoorunitandpassitovertheunit'ssuspensionbrackettothereceiverkitinstallationposition.Secureanyexcesscablewithacabletie.

Connectioncable

Wiringholeoftheindoorunit

Conector

Suspensionbracket

100-

200

mm

Fig. 3

6.Installtheairpanel(optional)ontheindoorunit.

150TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH8

PC-RLH8

Technical catalogue


7.Connectthereceiverkitusingthefollowingprocedure.

a-Routetheconnectioncableoutsidetheboxandconnectittothereceiverkitcable.Onceconnected,covertheconnectorwiththecoverandsecurethecablesusingaflexiblecabletie.

Flexiblecabletie

Cover

Flexiblecabletie

Connectioncable

Receiverkit

Connectioncable

Cornerdivision

Airpanel

Fig. 4

b-Hookthecabletieontotheairpanelringatthebackofthereceiverkit,asshowninthefollowingdiagram.

Ring

Flexiblecabletie

Fig. 5

c-HooktheL-shapedtabonthebackofthereceiverkitintothesquareholeoftheairpanel.

Fig. 6

8.Hooktheotherfixingtabs(3positions)intothesquareholesoftheairpanel.

NOTE

When removing the receiver kit after installing the air panel:- The corner point of the receiver kit can be raised by inserting a coin or flat-head

screwdriver in the area marked and pressing downwards. With raised, turn a coin or flat-head screwdriver under positions and , and the entire receiver kit will lift up.

- After disconnecting the fixing tabs (3 positions), slide the receiver kit in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Coinorflat-headscrewdriver

Raise

Areamarked

Fig. 7

151TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH8

PC - RLH8

Technical catalogue


2.5.7.5. Optional functions

$ CAUTION

Switch off all power sources before setting the DIP switches.

Setting the receiver as a secondary receiver, DIP switch (SW3)

Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.

(COOL)Button

Cover

DIPswitch(SW3)

(HEAT)Button

Wiringhole

1.Removethebase.

BoxControlprintedcircuitboards

2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover

Fig. 8

Operational function DIP switch adjustment (SW3)

Secondaryreceiveradjustment.

Tab. 3

152TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH�

PC-RLH�

Technical catalogue

PC-RLH� receiver kit installation

2.5.8 PC-RLH9 receiver kit installation






$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Donde haya vapores de aceite y el aceite se disperse. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.






Tab. 1

15�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH�

PC - RLH�

Technical catalogue




NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.



Receiverkit

1 Withconnectioncable

Screw 2 Tosecurethereceiverkit


Tab. 2



$ CAUTION


1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.Thecommunicationscablemustbesuppliedbytheinstaller.

2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.Thenremovethegrillefromtheairinlet.

3.Securethewirelessreceiverkittotheairpanelusingthescrews.(Tighteningtorqueshouldbe0.8Nm.) Airpanel (135)

ø7drainconnection

Wirelessreceiverkitcable

Factory-suppliedscrew

Wirelessreceiverkit

Auto-swingmotorcable


Cabletie

(3,5

)

Fig. 1

15�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH�

PC-RLH�

Technical catalogue


4.Runthecableinparallelwiththeautomaticswingmotorcableandattachwiththeflexiblecabletie.

Wirelessreceiverkitcable

Auto-swingmotorcable

Cabletie(factory-supplied)

Fig. 2

5.RemovethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletoterminalsAandBontheterminalplate.

NOTE

After connecting the cable, tie any excess cable using the flexible cable tie supplied by the manufacturer and insert the cables into the electrical control box.

Cabletietrade“B”

Cabletietrade“A”

Controlprintedcircuitboard

Terminalboard


Connectioncable

Fig. 3

6.Removethecoverfromtheremotecontroloftheairinletgrille.Presstheclipsontheremotecontrolcoverbyhand.

Hook

Coverfromtheremotecontrol


Airinletgrill


Airinletgrill

Hook

Fig. 4

7.Oncetheairpanelissecured,connecttheairinletgrilletotheairpanel.

-Checkthatthesquareholesontheairinletgrillelineupwiththelocationofthewirelessreceiverkitoftheairpanel.

-Makesurethecablefromthewirelessreceiverkitisnotobstructedbythesquareholeoftheairinletgrille.

-Ensurethatthesquareholeoftheairinletgrilledoesnotsnagthewirelessreceiverkitcable.

Airinletgrill

Airpanel

Wirelessreceiverkit

Fig. 5

155TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PC - RLH�

PC - RLH�

Technical catalogue



$ CAUTION



Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.

(COOL)Button

Cover

DIPswitch(SW3)

(HEAT)Button

Cablehole

1.Removethebase.


BoxControlprintedcircuitboard

Fig. 6

Operationalfunction DIPswitchadjustment(SW3)


Indoorunitidentification

Tab. 3

15� PC - RLH11

PC-RLH11

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation







$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or







Tab. 1

157PC - RLH11

PC - RLH11

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation



NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.



Receiverkit 1 Withconnectioncable


Screw 4 Tosecurethereceiverkit

Screw 2 Tosecuretheclamp

Clamp 2 Forsecuringthecables

Tab. 2


I. Electrical connection

$ CAUTION


1.Installthewirelessreceiverkitandindoorunitatthesametime.

2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.

3.Makesurethedistancebetweenthewirelessreceiverkitandindoorunitislessthan5metres.

4.Removethecoverusingaflat-headscrewdriver.

Fig. 1

5.Installthewirelessreceiverkitonthewallorceiling,asshownbelow:

158 PC - RLH11

PC-RLH11

Technical catalogue


II. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed

a- Mount the wireless receiver kit fixing bracket with the screws (A) at the � positions.

Screw(A)

Fig. 2

b- Cut one of the pre-drilled holes (*) on the cover.

Fig. 3

c- Run the cable through the groove and pull it out through the pre-drilled hole.

Fig. 4

d- Fit the cover, making sure not to snag the cable.

Cover

ClicksoundFixingbracket

Hook

Fig. 5

15�PC - RLH11

PC - RLH11

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation

III. If using an electric control box.

a. There are various types of electrical boxes on the market which can be used for this installation, for example:

- Electrical box for one remote control unit (without cover.) - Electrical box for one remote control unit (with cover) - Output box (with cover)

Also used: - Rigid metal duct (at least Ø20) - Screws (M4) (field supply)

Fig. 6

b- Insert the cable into the rigid metal duct.

Cable

Fig. 7

c- Mount the wireless receiver kit fixing bracket using the screws supplied by the installer. The diagram shows a switch box for 1 remote control.

Cable

Thescrewssuppliedbytheinstaller

Fig. 8

d- Fit the cover as it was before it was removed.

6.RemovethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletoterminalsAandBontheterminalplate.

NOTE

- If using the RPK model, connect the cable to the CN13 connector (3P blue) on the PCB of the indoor unit using the cable with connector (factory-supplied with the RPK).

- After connecting the cable, tie any excess cable using a cable tie (factory-supplied) and insert in the electrical control box.

Fig. 9

1�0 PC - RLH11

PC-RLH11

Technical catalogue



$ CAUTION




(COOL)button

Cover

DIPswitch(SW3)

(HEAT)button

Cablehole

1.Removethebase.


BaseBoxPrintedcircuitboards

Fig. 10




Tab. 3

1�1PC - RLH1�

PC - RLH1�

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation







$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or







Tab. 1

1�2 PC - RLH1�

PC-RLH1�

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation



NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2).- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.



Receiverkit 1 With connection cable

Connectioncable 1

Flexiblecabletie 2 For securing the cables

Cover 1 For securing the cables

Tab. 2


Standard wiring

$ CAUTION


1��PC - RLH1�

PC - RLH1�

Technical catalogue


1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.

2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.Thenremovethegrillefromtheairinlet.

3.Thisreceiverkitcanonlybeinstalledinoneposition.

Cablehole

Installationposition

Electricalbox

Fig. 1

4.Removethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletotheterminalblock(white),asshownbelow.

Connectioncable

Terminalboard


PCB

Cabletietrade“A” Cabletietrade“B”

Fig. 2

5.Drawtheconnectioncablethroughthewiringholeoftheindoorunitandrunitacrosstothereceiverkitinstallationposition.

6.Installtheairpanel(optional)ontheindoorunit.

7.Connectthereceiverkitusingthefollowingprocedure:

1�� PC - RLH1�

PC-RLH1�

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation

a-Passthecablethroughthecornerholeandconnecttheconnectioncableandreceiverkitwire.Oncethecableisconnected,covertheconnectorwiththecoverandsecureitusingacabletie.

Airpanel

Corneraccess

Connectioncable

Connectioncable

Cover

Cabletie

Receiverkit

Cabletie

Fig. 3

b-Hookthetabonthebackofthereceiverkittothepinoftheairpanel,asshownbelow.

Pin

Cabletie

Fig. 4

c-HooktheL-shapedtabonthebackofthereceiverkitintothesquareholeontheairpanelandsecureitwithascrew.

Screw

Tabs(2positions)

L-shapedtab

Fig. 5

8.Hooktheotherfixingtabs(3positions)intothesquareholesoftheairpanel.

$ CAUTION

To remove the receiver kit after mounting the air panel:- Remove the screws (4 positions) from the front of the air panel.- Move the receiver kit by hand in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove the tabs

(2 positions) from the corner cover, then slide the receiver in the direction indicated by the arrow .

Fig. 6

1�5PC - RLH1�

PC - RLH1�

Technical catalogue



$ CAUTION




(COOL)Button

1.Removethebase

2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover(HEAT)button DIPswitch

(SW3)

Fig. 7




Tab. 3

1�� PC - RLH1�

PC-RLH1�

Technical catalogue

TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Table of contents

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3. CENTRALREMOTECONTROLS..........................................................169

3.1. PSC-5S...................................................................................................169

3.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................169



3.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................171


3.1.4. Operation................................................................................................179



3.1.5.1.Inputandoutputfunctions..................................................................................1833.1.5.2.Controlinternalfunctions....................................................................................187


3.1.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................1883.1.6.2.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................189



PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

General details

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3. CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLS

3.1. PSC-5S




- 1� indoor unit groups can be connected, with 1 main remote control connected to a H-LINK on each group that can control up to a maximum of 128 indoor units.

- UP to 8 central remote controls (PSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.

- In addition to the basic functions, operation mode and temperature setting, the air flow and automatic louver can also be adjusted.

- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the error.

- Also includes the option of receiving and sending external signals, along with the option to connect with the PSC-5T timer.

- The external signals control the following functions: -Simultaneousoperation/stopofalltheunits. -Simultaneousemergencystopofalltheunits. -Operationsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits. -Alarmsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits.


This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.Remote controls with which the PSC-5S central control is compatible:

Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9PC-P5H PC-RLH8

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1

Thisremotecontrolis100%compatiblewiththefollowingindoorunits:

Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407CRCI-FSGE RPC-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E

RPI-FSGE RPF-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E

RPI-FSGE1 RPFI-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R

RPC-FSGE RPK-FSG2M RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E

RPF-FSG RCD-FSG(1/2) RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E

RPFI-FSG RCI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSNM RPFI-G7E

RPK-FSGM RPI-FSG2Ei RCD-FSN RPK-G7M

RCD-FSG RPC-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E

RCI-FSG2E RPF-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M

RPI-FSG2E RPFI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M

RPIM-FSNE

RCIM-FSNE

Tab. 2

General Details and General Dimensions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

170TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S


The central station can be used together with each unit's individual remote control.

This provides the user with a centralised control of all information sent from all units, located for example in a maintenance room or central control office, allowing direct and instant access to information on each of the units as well as warnings and alerts on any faults that may occur.There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit.The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures. (For more details, see PC-P1HE)


53

83.5

120

120

15

20

RMT.SWNAVL

FILTERABNML

CHECK

EMERGENCYDEMANDTIMERGROUP

910111213141516

12345678

HIGH

MED

LOW LOUVER

NOFUNCTION

˚CTEMP.SET

COOL

AUTO

HEATDRY

FAN

AUTO

GROUPRUN/STOP

Fig. 1

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

171TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3.1.3. Installation






$ CAUTION




Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

172TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S





Tab. 3



Atleast50mm

Fig. 2


NOTE

Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.



Centralremotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation.


Tab. 4

NOTE

Bear in mind that the central remote control is divided into two parts:- Central remote control- Power source

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S



Screwdriver

BracketGroove

Centralcontrol

Hendiduras


Groove

Bracket

Groove

Fig. 3

2. Connect the power supply part to the control box, as shown below.

NOTE

Do not lay the cables from the power source and the control unit in the same duct, since the power cable is liable to cause interference with the control cable.

Controlcable

Screws

Powersupplypart

Powersupplywire

Controlbox

Fig. 4

3. Connect the control unit part to the power supply part. Join them at the top first, then at the bottom.

Fig. 5

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S


I. Electrical wiring connection

Up to 8 central controls can be connected to the H-LINK system.

Toconnecttoterminalblock1and2oftheindoorunitandtheoutdoorunit

Outdoorunits

Indoorunits

Shieldedtwistedpaircable(1p-0,75mm2)orTwistedpaircable

Powersource(220Vcaor240Vca)

H-LINK

Fig. 6

Electrical connection of the PSC-5S central control to the PSC-5T timer.

NOTE

- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one PSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different

remote control. The timer can then be connected to the other remote.

PSC-5T PSC-5STB2Connector

Outdoorunit

Indoorunits

Controls

Accessorycable(1m)

Toothercentralstations

Cabledepartrenzado1P-0,75mm2

(máx.100m)

Powersource220Vcaor240VCN1

AvailablefortheH-Linkconnection(toconnecttoterminalblock1and2oftheindoorunitandtheoutdoorunit)

Fig. 7

II. DIP switch adjustment

If connecting more than one central control (up to a maximum of 8) to the H-LINK system, first set the address using the DIP switch DSW1, as shown below:

NOTE

The DIP switches are all deactivated before they are sent from the factory.

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

175TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

■ Address setting with DSW1 Dip Switch

The DSW1 is located on the PCB on the inside of the control unit, as shown in the following diagram:

DSW2

DSW1

PSC-5S

Fig. 8

Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Address6 Address7 Address8

Tab. 5

Splitthecentralcontrolpowersupplylinefromthemainpowersupplylineusingajunctionbox,asshowninthefollowingdiagram:

220Vcaor240Vca

Junctionbox

Totheoutdoorunitordisjunctor

Centralremotecontrol Indoorunit

Fig. 9

$ CAUTION

- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to

malfunction.

III. Automatic group configuration

WhenswitchingonthePSC-5Scentralcontrolunitforthefirsttime,itwillautomaticallyconnecttotheindoor/outdoorunitH-Linknetworkandsearchforalltheunitstowhichitisconnected.

ThecentralcontrolLCDscreenwillshowthefollowing:

Refrigerantcycleinconnectionchecking Numberofcheckedindoorunitsconnectedtotherefrigerantcycle

$ CAUTION

- Automatic configuration can last for several minutes since the PSC-5S central control will check each and every unit connected (up to 256).

- If the process stops or becomes inactive for more than 5 minutes, this means there is some kind of communication problem on the H-Link network (unit alarm triggered, incorrect H-Link wiring or incorrect termination resistance configuration).

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

Inordertoidentifythemasterunitforeachgroup,thePSC-5Swillcarryoutthefollowingsteps: -Forgroup1,itwillsearchallindoorunitswiththeaddress"0"andwillsettheunitwiththelowestrefrigerantaddress

asthemaster. -Itwillthenrepeatthefirststepforallthegroups(upto16).

Ifthefirstconfigurationcheckonallunitsshowsthattheyhavedifferentaddressesandareallcontrolledbyseparateremotecontrols,thegroupscreatedcanbeconsideredcorrect,andtheLCDscreenonthePSC-5Scentralcontrolunitwillappearasshowninthediagram.

Otherwise,itwillsimplyread"AA"andthegroupsmustbeconfiguredasshownonthenextfewpages.

$ CAUTION

- If the PSC-5S is not connected to the H-Link or the units connected to the H-Link are not powered, the PSC-5S will not locate all the units and will not perform this check, since it does not have any outgoing power.

- To force the unit to perform the check again, erase the EEPROM as indicated in the Maintenance and Repair section.

IV. Group configuration

Thecentralcontrolunitisdesignedtocontrolupto16groupsofupto16units(themaximumnumberofindoorunitsisdefinedbytheH-Linklimit:128).

Eachofthesegroupsismadeupoftwotypesofunit: • MasterUnit:Unitselectedineachgrouptocontrolandseteachofthegroupparametersequallyandatthesame

time.

• SlaveUnit:Units(upto15inonegroup)whichfollowthemasterunitconfigurationassignedforthisgroup.

Tousethecentralcontrolunitcorrectly,eachgroupofunitsmustbeconfiguredasindicatedbelow:

$ CAUTION

- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to

malfunction.

Examplesofgroups

IUIU

PC-P1HEPC-P1HE

IU IU IU

PC-2HTE

Master Slave

1group 1group 1group 1group

Fig. 10

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

177TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

V. Setting the master unit

• Press and hold the "CHECK" button for 3 seconds and the LCD screen will display the following:

“1”indicatesthemasterunitsettingmode. Numberoftheoutdoorunittobeset.(PressCHECKagaintoseemoreoptions). Whenthe"SET"indicationappears,theindoorunitshownontheLCDscreenissetasthe

master.(If"SET"doesnotappear,theunitisnotsetasthemaster). Addressoftheindoorunittobeset.(Tochangethedirection,press“TEMP”).¥ Whenthe"CHECK"indicationappears,thecentralcontrolunitissettocheckmode.¦ Statusofmasterunitforeachgroup:

if{ison:themasterunitisset.if{isoff:themasterunitisnotset.

§ Numberofthegroupbeingset.

• Selecting the group to be set.Eachtimethe"GROUP"buttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillskiptothenextnumberitreachesthegrouptobeset.

• Setting the indoor unitTochangethenumberoftheoutdoorunitpress“TEMP”.Tochangetheaddressoftheindoorunitpress“TEMP”andselecttheunitthatneedstobeset.Theindicationwillchangeintheordershownbelow:

$ CAUTION

- When the number indicator for both the outdoor unit and indoor unit reads “--”, the address of the indoor unit cannot be changed, even by pressing “TEMP” .

- The following units are not shown: The number of an outdoor unit which has no indoor unit connected to it. The address of the indoor units that are not connected.- The indoor unit which has already been set as the master unit will not be indicated.

• Activating the master unit.Afterselectingtheindoorunitfromtheaforementionedrefrigerantcircuit,press“RUN/STOP”.Theunitshownwillbesetasthemasterunitandtheindicators“{”and“SET”willappear.

NOTE

Each time the "RUN/STOP" button is pressed, the selected unit will be set as the master unit or the setting will be removed.

$ CAUTION

- Only one indoor unit may be set as the master unit in each group. To set the current master unit as the master unit for another group, cancel the current master unit setting and set it to the other group.

- If there are two indoor units with and without automatic louver in the same group, set the unit equipped with louver as the master unit. If the indoor unit without an automatic louver is set as the master unit, the louver setting will not be available for all other units in the group.

• Returning to normal status.Press"RESET"toreturntonormalstatus.

Installation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

178TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

VI. Setting the slave unit

• Press and hold the "CHECK" button for 3 seconds and the LCD screen will display the following:

Thescreenwillshowthemasterunitsetting.

• Press "CHECK" to switch to the slave unit setting.ExplanationoftheLCDscreeninslaveunitsetting: “2”indicatestheslaveunitsettingmode. Numberoftheoutdoorunittobeset.(Tochangethenumber,press“TEMP”). Whenthe"SET"indicationappears,theindoorunitshownontheLCDscreenissetasthe

slave.(If"SET"doesnotappear,theslaveunitisnotset). Addressoftheindoorunittobeset.(Tochangethedirection,press“TEMP”).¥ WhentheCHECKindicationappears,thecentralcontrolunitissettocheckmode.¦ Statusofslaveunitforeachgroup:

if{ison:theslaveunitisset.if{isoff:theslaveunitisnotset.

§ Numberofthegroupbeingset.

• Selecting the group to be set.Eachtimethe"GROUP"buttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillskiptothenextnumberitreachesthegrouptobeset.

• Setting the indoor unitTochangethenumberoftheoutdoorunitpress“TEMP”.Tochangetheaddressoftheindoorunitpress“TEMP”andselecttheunitthatneedstobeset.Theindicationwillchangeintheordershownbelow:

$ CAUTION

- When the number indicator for both the outdoor unit and indoor unit reads “--”, the address cannot be changed, even by pressing “TEMP” .

- The following elements are not shown: The number of an outdoor unit which has no indoor unit connected to it. The address of the indoor units that are not connected.- The indoor unit which has already been set as the master unit or the slave unit will not be indicated.

• Activating the slave unit.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press“RUN/STOP”.Theunitshownwillbesetastheslaveunitandtheindicators“{”and“SET”willappear.

NOTE

Each time the "RUN/STOP" button is pressed, the selected unit will be set as the slave unit or the setting will be removed.

$ CAUTION

- Up to 15 slave units can be configured in one group. (The maximum number of units is 16 per group, including the master unit).

- To change the slave unit setting to another group, cancel the current slave unit setting and set it up for the other group.

- If all the units are set as masters, the central control unit will not be able to switch to the slave unit setting mode.

• Returning to normal status.Press"RESET"toreturntonormalstatus.

Operation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3.1.4. Operation


FanspeedindicatorIndicatesthefanspeedselectedforeachgroupindicated:“HIGH”,“MED”,“LOW”.

ModeindicationIndicatestheoperationmodeselectedfortheindicatedgroup:“Fan”,“Cool”,“Heat”and“Dry”.

NOTE

The automatic mode is available if the AUTO function is on.

Runindicator(redpilotlight)

"RUN/STOP"button

"MODE"button

“FANSPEED”button Fig. 11 Model: PSC-5S

"ON/OFFTIMER"button(starts/stopstimer).Usedtoswitchthetimeron/off;whenthisbuttonispressed,thetimerscheduleofthecontrolunit(PSC-5T)willbecomeavailableandthe"TIMER"indicationwillappear.

“RMT.SWAVL/NAVL”buttonUsedtoeitherblockoracceptthecontrolunitthrougheachremotecontrol.When“RMT.SWNAVL”appears,useoftheremotecontrolisblocked.

NOTE

When monitor mode is selected, the aforementioned operation modes will be indicated along with the temperature setting.

"LOUVER"button

"TEMP"button(temperaturesetting)

Buttonwithnoassignedfunction

“CHECK”buttonUsedtosettheunitasmasterorslave

“RESET”buttonUsedtocancelthe“CHECK”and“FILTER”functions.

GroupselectionbuttonUsedtochangethenumberofthegroupofinteriorunitstobemonitored(01to16).Press“AA”tomonitorallunitssimultaneously.

Indicators:“CHECK”,“FILTER”,“RMT.SWNAVL”and“ABNML”(alarm)

Temperatureindicator

“TIMER”,“DEMAND”,“EMERGENCY”and“NOFUNCTION”indication. “TIMER”appearswhenthetimerisconnected.“DEMAND”appearswhenthe"DEMAND"function(ThermostatStoppage)isselected. “EMERGENCY”appearswhentheoutdoorinputfunctionsendsouttheemergencystopsignal.“NOFUNCTION”whenthebuttonpressedisnotavailable.

Thesymbolindicatestheoperatingconditionofeachgroup.Offindicatesastoppage,onindicatesrunning,andflashingindicatesanabnormalcondition.

Groupnumberindication

Modelnumbercheckingindication

Swinglouverindication

Tab. 6

Operation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

180TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3.1.4.2. Operation Mode Selection Procedure

I. Group selection and unit operation status check

• Supplying power to the unit.

$ CAUTION

- The unit should be powered for at least 12 hours before starting it up to protect the compressor.- Do not interrupt the electrical current while the air conditioning system is in use.

• Press the “GROUP” button.Pressing"GROUP"repeatedlychangesthenumberofthegrouptobecheckedintheorderindicatedbelow.Inthecaseof"AA",allunitsarecontrolledsimultaneously.

• When the group is selected, the group settings are displayed. Ifusingtheremotecontrol,thesettingcontentwillbeindicated.1■~16■showstheoperatingstatusforeachgroup,asfollows:- “OFF”(■):stopped- On():runningFlashing(■):abnormalcondition

Therunindicator(redpilotlight)indicatesthefollowing:- Off:allgroupsareswitchedoff- On:1groupormoreisrunning- Flashing:thereisanabnormalconditionon1ormoregroups

FortheAAgroup,theindications(operationmode,temperaturesetting,airflow,louverangleand"RMT.SWNAVL")willonlyappearifallthegroupshavethesamesetting.

II. Changing operation mode

COOL:CoolsthetemperatureoftheroomthroughthedistributionofcoldairHEAT:HeatsthetemperatureoftheroomthroughthedistributionofhotairDRY:DehumidifiestheroommorethaninnormalcoolingmodeFAN:Circulatestheairintheroom

• Press the "GROUP" button to select the group.Inthediagramontheright,group4isselected.

• Press the “MODE” button.Bypressing“MODE”,theindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:

FAN COOL HEAT DRY

NOTE

Shown below is the operation mode setting for group 4. The same setting procedure should be followed for the other groups. If using the same setting for all groups, select group number AA.

Operation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

181TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

III. Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver angle

• Press the GROUP button and select the group to set.

• Setting the temperature.Setthetemperaturebypressingthe“TEMP”button.Pressingincreasesthetemperatureby1°C(maximum:30°C).Pressingreducesthetemperatureby1°C(minimum:19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode).Ifispressedfor3secondswiththetemperaturesetto30°Cortotheminimum,thetemperaturewillnotchangeandthetemperatureindicationwillappearas“--”.Inthiscase,pressor,andthetemperaturesettingindicationwillreturntotheminimumtemperatureorto30°C.Inthediagramontheright,thetemperatureissetto22°C.

• Setting the fan speed.Bypressing“FANSPEED”,theindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:

HIGH MED LOW

In the diagram on the right, the speed is set to HIGH.

NOTE

In dehumidifying mode, the fan speed changes automatically and remains fixed on "LOW". In this case, the fan speed cannot be changed (the indication will remain on the setting status).

• Setting the louver angle.Bypressing“AUTOLOUVER”,thelouverangleindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:Setthebuttontothe“ “position;theindicationwillchangeto“ “toindicatethatthesystemhasbeensettoautomaticswingmode.Pressthebuttonagainandtheindicationwillchangeto“ “.Thediagramontherightshowstheautomaticswingmodesetting.

NOTE

- There is a phase shift between the louver position indicated on the LCD screen and the actual angle of the louver during operation. Therefore, when adjusting the louver, set the angle according to the angle indicated on the LCD screen.

- When "AUTO LOUVER" is pressed, the louver may not stop immediately.

$ CAUTION

The louver angle changes automatically in heating mode to control the unit.

IV. Running/stopping the units


• Press the RUN/STOP button.Dependingonthestatusofthemachinesinthegroup,theywillswitcheitheronoroffwhenthebuttonispressed.BypressingthebuttonontheAAgroup,allmachinesinallgroupswilleitherswitchonoroff.

Operation

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

182TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

V. Block remote control operation

Thisfunctionblockstheuseoftheremotecontrolforcontrollingindoorunits.Whenthisisactivated,thescreenwilldisplayCENTRAL.


• Press the “RMT.SW NAVL” button.Pressing"RMT.SWNAVL”switchestheremotecontrolfunctioneitheronoroff,andthescreenwillshow“RMT.SWNAVL”forthegroupselected.

VI. Timer operation

Switchesthetimerfunction(PSC-5T)eitheronoroff.Thetimercanbesetindividuallytoeachgroup,howevertheschedulewillbethesameforallunitsinthegroupsforwhichitisset.


• Press the “TIMER” button.Pressing"TIMER"activatesthetimerinthegrouptobeset.The“TIMER”indicationappearsontheLCD.

VII. LCD screen indications

The“EMERGENCY”indicationappearswhenanemergencystopsignalisreceivedthroughtheoutdoorinput.Duringemergencystoppage,theindoorunitswillstopandtheremotecontrolfunctionwillbecomeunavailable.

“DEMAND”isshownwhenthe"DEMAND"function(ThermostatStoppage)isselected.Shownonlyintheselectedgroupsandwhenthedemandsignalisreceivedthroughtheoutdoorinput,the"DEMAND"indicationwillflash.

The"FILTER"indicationappearswhentheindoorunitairfilterisclogged.Cleanit.Aftercleaningit,press"RESET"toturnoffthe"FILTER"indication.

Operation and Optional functions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

VIII. Indications in abnormal conditions

Whendetectinganalarm,therunpilotlight(red)willflash.ThealarmwillbeindicatedontheLCDscreen.“{”willflashtoindicatethegroupforwhichthealarmwastriggered.PresstheGROUPbuttonandselectthegroupfromwhichthealarmwastriggered;theunitnumber,modelnumber,alarmcodeandthenormalindicationwillthenappearon-screenrepeatedly.

NOTE

Depending on the unit model, the model number may not be displayed.If there is an abnormal condition on several units, the indications will be shown alternately.

N. of ref.Dir. of U.I.

ModelcodeAlarmcode

Ifallindicationsdisappear,thismaybeduetoapowerfailureorelectricalnoise.Ifthefaultisduetoapowerfailure,theunitwillnotrestartautomatically;youwillneedtoperformthestart-upprocedureagain.Iftheelectricalsupplyisrestoredwithin2secondsorless,theunitwillrestartautomatically.Ifthefaultisduetoelectricalnoise,theunitmaybestoppedbytheelectricalnoiseprotectiondevice.Afterresolvingtheproblem,gothroughthestart-upprocedureagain.Alarm61,whichonlyappearsforthePSC-5Sunit,meansaunitregisteredinagroupcannotbelocated.TheproblemmaybedueafaultontheunitorontheH-Linkconnection.

Model number

Indication Model

H Heatpump

P Inverter

F Multiple

C Coolingonly

E Other


3.1.5.1. Input and output functions

The central station has two input functions and two output functions, as shown below.

Input setting mode, output setting mode and connector.

Mode Port

DSW2 setting

Input1 CN21-2Levelsignalfor

simultaneousstart/stop

Simultaneousoperation,

pulsesignal

Input2 CN22-3

“DEMAND“function

(ThermostatStoppage)

Emergencystop

Simultaneousstop,pulse

signal

Output1 CN31-2 Simultaneousoperationoutput

Output2 CN31-3 Simultaneousalarmoutput

Tab. 7

NOTE


Location of DSW2

DSW2

DSW1

PSC-5S

Fig. 12

• Required component specifications:- ConnectiontoCN2orCN3,12Vdc,novoltage- Relé“OMRONMY”- PCC-1A3-pinconnectorcord

Optional functions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

1. Level signal for simultaneous start/stop

Thisisaremoteon/offfunctionwhichusesthelevelsignal(ON/OFF).Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.

.

Fig. 13

Timechart

Time

Signto1and2ofCN2

Controlwiththeremotecontrol

Unitoperation

Fig. 14

Thisisaremoteon/offfunctionwhichusesthepulsesignalThebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.

Fig. 15

Timechart

Signto1and2ofCN2

Signto2and3ofCN2


Unitoperation

Time

Fig. 16

Optional functions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

185TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3. Emergency stop

Thisisaremoteemergencystopfunctionwhichusesthepulsesignal.Thisstopsallunitscontrolledbythecentralstation.Nofurthersettingscanbemadeusingtheremotecontroluntiltheemergencystopfunctionisswitchedoff.

Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.

.

Fig. 17

Timechart

Signto2and3ofCN2


Unitoperation

Time

Fig. 18

4. “DEMAND“ function (Thermostat Stoppage)

Thisisaremotethermostatsignalfortheselectedunits.OnlythoseunitsshowingtheDEMANDindicationwillfollowthisorder.Seethe"Thermostatstoppagesettingprocedure"section.

Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.

.

Fig. 19

Timechart

Signto2and3ofCN2

Controlwiththecentralstation

UnitoperationThermostaton

Time

Fig. 20

Optional functions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

I. Thermostat stoppage setting procedure

• Changing to check modePressthe“CHECK”buttonforatleast3secondstochangethecentralstationcheckmode.

• Changing to thermostat stoppage setting modePressandholdthe"CHECK"buttonuntiltheseven-segmentdisplayshows"5"(thermostatstoppagesettingmode),toperformthecheck.TheLCDscreenwillshowthefollowing:

“5”Indicatesthermostatstoppagesettingmode. Numberoftherefrigerantcycleontheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobe

set. Addressoftheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobeset. When"CHECK"appears,thecentralstationisincheckmode.¥ Thegroupwiththermostatstoppagecontrolalreadysetbedisplayed.

(“{”on:optionset;“{”off:optionnotset).¦ Onlythegroupforwhichthemasterunitisalreadysetwillbedisplayed.Thegroupthatstill

needstobesetwillflash.

• Selecting the group to be set.Selectthegrouptosetusingthe"GROUP"button;eachtimethebuttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillmove.

Pressthe"RUN/STOP"buttontosettheselectedgroupwiththermostatstoppagecontrol.Theindicators“{”and“DEMAND”willappear,indicatingthatthesettingisapplied

5. Simultaneous operation outputThisfunctionisusedtochecktheoperationalstatusoftheunitscheckedbythecentralstation.Ifanyoftheunitsareon,thesimultaneousmodeoutputwillbeactivated.Thebasicwiringisshownbelow.

.

Fig. 21

6. Simultaneous alarm output

Thisfunctionisusedtocheckthealarmstatusoftheunitscheckedbythecentralstation.Ifanyoftheunitsareindicatinganalarmstatus,thisoutputwillbeactive.Thebasicwiringisshownbelow.

.

Fig. 22

Optional functions

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

187TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3.1.5.2. Control internal functions

• Switching to option setting mode.

Pressandholdthe"CHECK"buttonfor3seconds.Duringthistime,allgroupswillswitchoff.Thecentralcontrolswitchestooptionsettingmode.The"CHECK"indicationwillthenappear,and"1"(masterunitsettingmode)willbeshownonthe7-segmentdisplayforthecheck.

$ CAUTION

If a group is running, the central control cannot be changed to check mode.

• Selecting the function to be set.

Pressthe"CHECK"buttonuntilthefunctiontobesetappearsonthe7-segmentdisplay.7

segment disp.

Function

ALocking

operationmode

Lockingthetemperature

setting

cLockingcooling

only

dLockingtheair

flow

E

Automaticcooling/heating

mode

“A”indicatestheoptionsettingmode. Numberoftherefrigerantcycleontheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobe

set. When"SET"appears,theindoorunitissetwiththeoptionalfunction. Addressoftheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobeset.¥ When"CHECK"appears,thecentralcontrolisincheckmode..¦ Optionsettingstatusforeachgroup:

(“{”on:optionset;“{”off:optionnotset).§ Numberofthatyouneedtoset.

• Selecting the group to be set.Selectthegrouptosetusingthe"GROUP"button;eachtimethebuttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillmove.

Pressthe"RUN/STOP"buttontosetthefunctionfortheselectedgroup.Theindicators“{”and“SET”willappear,indicatingthatthesettingisapplied

$ CAUTION

- If the optional functions are set using the central control, they will need to be set for the group controlled by the remote control.- If the optional functions (elements A-E shown above) are set using the remote control, they will need to be set for the group controlled

by the central control.


PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

188TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S


3.1.6.1. Controller reboot procedure


1

Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.

“GROUP” “MODE”

5 NOTE

If a group is running, the NO FUNCTION indication will appear and the central station will not change to self-check mode.

3

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,inself-checkmode.


1

â AUTO AUTO

For1second

2

âFor1second

3

âFor1second

4

âFor1second

5

âFor1second

(Allindicationsoff)

6

â AUTO AUTO

For3seconds(Allindicationson)

Todelete"EEPROM"memoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.

“GROUP” “MODE” 5

Goto5

4 Ifthecombinationisnotentered,thetestwillbecompleteandthescreenwillgoblank,itcanthenbeusedagain.

5

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,instart-upmode.

No. LCDindication Action

1

âAfterpressingthethree

buttons

2

âPress“RESET”

3

âThe“EEPROM”iserased

and0

4

âThesystemwillstartup

NOTE

In this condition:Press “CHECK” if start-up is not required, and the system will return to operation mode.


PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

3.1.6.2. Self-check mode

$ CAUTION

Switch off all the groups of units.


1

Self-checkmodewillstart,andthefollowingsequenceofimageswillappearonscreenPressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.

UNITSELECTION

MODE

5 NOTE


3

LCD(liquidcrystaldisplay)check:thisiscarriedoutautomatically.


1

â AUTO AUTO

For1second

2

âFor1second

3

âFor1second

4

âFor1second

5

âFor1second

(Allindicationsoff)

6

â AUTO AUTO


4• RUN pilot light check. TheRUNpilotlightwillflashtwice.

5• Button input and DSW check. PressallthebuttonsandsettheDSWtoONorOFFalternately,checkingthatthenumber"29"isindicatedasthenormalinputnumber.

6• Transmission circuit check. Thischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.

7

• External output check. Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN3.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -SwitchonLED1for2seconds -SwitchonLED2for2seconds -SwitchoffLED1andLED2for2seconds -SwitchonLED1andLED2 (TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).


PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

8

• External input check.Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN2.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -Whenbutton1issettoON,LED1willbeON -Whenbutton1issettoOFFandbutton2issettoON,LED2willbeON -Whenbuttons1and2aresettoON,LED1andLED2willbeON -(TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).

9• EEPROM check(Consult4.2.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure)

10• IC check for the control timerThischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.

LED1

LED2

CN3

1

2

3

Resistance

CN2

1

2

3

Button2

Button1

Fig. 23


PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S







PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmbeigecolour

(twistedandshielded2cable) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)Indoorunit

PCBsideRemotecontrol

side


PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC









300mm(approx.)

Tab. 9

PSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5S

Table of contents

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.2. CSC-5S..................................................................................................195

3.2.1. Generaldetails......................................................................................195


3.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................196


3.2.4 Operation................................................................................................202

3.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2023.2.4.2.Remotecontrols.................................................................................................2033.2.4.3.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................203



3.2.6.1.Chillerunitcheckingprocedure..........................................................................2083.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................2103.2.6.3.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................211



CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

General details

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2. CSC-5S


Selection advantages


- 8 chiller and 8 CSC-5S central remote control addresses can be connected on each H-LINK

- Up to 8 central remote controls (CSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.

- Basic functions, heat/cold mode and temperature setting.

- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the error.

- A standard external input terminal is included for possible connection to a timer.

- The external signals control the following functions: -Start/Stop. -Operationmode(Cooling/Heating). -Temperaturesetting(Cold/Heat).


This remote control can be connected to the following water chiller units:

Series-G2 Series-G1 Series-GRCUE-40AG2 RHUE-40AG2 RCUE-40WG2 RCUE-40AG1 RCUE-40AG RHUE-40AG RCUE-40WG RCUE-40CLG

RCUE-50AG2 RHUE-50AG2 RCUE-50WG2 RCUE-50AG1 RCUE-50AG RHUE-50AG RCUE-50WG RCUE-50CLG


RCUE-70AG2 RHUE-70AG2




RCUE-140AG2 RHUE-140AG2 RCUE-140AG1 RCUE-140AG

RCUE-150WG2 RCUE-150AG1 RCUE-150AG RCUE-150WG


RCUE-180AG2 RHUE-180AG2 RCUE-180WG2 RCUE-180AG1 RCUE-180AG RCUE-180WG



RCUE-270AG1 RCUE-270AG

RCUE-280AG2* RCUE-300AG1 RCUE-300AG

RCUE-320AG2*




Tab. 1

* Water chiller units with up to two addresses.Take this into account when making the initial calculations or assessing unit dimensions.


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2.2. Dimension details

53

83.5

120

120

15

20

RUN/STOP UNITSELECTION

EMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

OUTLET

SET

TEMP.

TEMP.

PR. MPa

CHECKABNMLLOCAL

Fig. 1. CSC-5S central remote control dimensions

3.2.3. Installation



- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices should be activated too often or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the

mains and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact


$ CAUTION

- DO NOT install the remote control or wiring in the following places: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or



Installation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S




Cablelength 30m 500mTab. 2



Atleast50mm

Fig. 2


NOTE

Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box. - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.

Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts




Tab. 3

NOTE

Bear in mind that the central remote control is divided into two parts:- Central remote control.- Power supply.

Installation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S


1. Insert the flat headed screwdriver's tip into the grooves on the bottom of the bracket. Push and turn the screwdriver. Remove the part of the remote control linked to the power supply part, as shown in the following figure:

Screwdriver

Bracket

Central control

Groove

Groove

Screwdriver

Bracket

Bracket

Groove

Fig. 3

2. Connect the power supply part to the control box, as shown below.

NOTE

Do not lay the power supply cable and the remote control cable in the same conduit

Power supply part

Control cable Control box

Power supply wire

Screws

Fig.4

3. Connect the control unit part to the power supply part. Position the top first and then the bottom.

Fig. 5

Installation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S


I. Electrical wiring connection

$ CAUTION

- Do not position all the signal cables together with the power supply cable and other signal cables. The noise caused by these cables could lead to the malfunction of the remote control and chiller unit. If the signal cables are next to the power cables and any other signal cables, maintain a distance of at least 15 cm between the signal cables and other cables, or pass the signal cables through a metal conduit which is earthed at one end.

- If the power supply cable is accidentally connected to the terminal board for the transmission signal and voltage is applied, the fuse will blow to protect the printed circuit board. In this case, this remote control can operate without the fuse, if pin no. 2 of DSW3 is set to the ON position.

- If the PSC-5T remote control's timer is used, set the same address no. for the remote control and the timer.- Make sure that the wiring is correct (do place the signal cables together with the electricity cables). Incorrect

wiring could cause the remote control to malfunction- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to

malfunction.

Electrical connection of the CSC-5S central remote control with the PSC-5T timer

NOTE

- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one CSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different


Outdoorunits(uptoamaximumof8units)

1 21 2

PSC-5TConnector

Terminal1 2

CSC-5S

CN1TB21 2 1 2 3

TB1

FG

Powersource220Vcaor240V

ToTB2ofanotherremotecontrol

Twistedpaircable1P-0,75mm2(max.100m)

Accessorycable(1m)

H-LINK

Fig. 6

NOTE

- Always use 0.75 mm2 twisted pair cable.- Use the field supply cable for connection if the CSC-5S central remote control is used together with the PSC-5T.- The maximum total length of the wiring for all units is 1000 metres.

Installation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

200TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

II. DIP switch adjustment

If connecting more than one central control (up to a maximum of 8) to the H-LINK system, first set the address using the DIP switch DSW1, as shown below:

NOTE

The DIP switches are deactivated before leaving the factory.

Pin no. Setting contentDSW SETTING

CommentsON OFF

DSW1

1

Settheaddress Consultthefollowingtable. Necessarywhenmorethantwounitsareconnected.2

3

4 Connectioncheck.Settingunavailable

Settingavailable.

H-Link(CSC-5Schiller).

DSW2

1 Monitormode.Multiplecontrol.

Individualcontrol.

2 Outputsignaltimefortransmission.

60s 30s

3 - - -

4 - - -

Tab. 4

III. Address setting with DSW1


Tab. 5

Split the central control power supply line from the main power supply line using a junction box, as shown in the following diagram:

PSC-5S

PSC-5S1 2 3 4 5 6(7)0

Upto8CSC-5S

FirstCSC-5C SecondCSC-5S

Fig. 7

Installation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

201TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

IV. Group registration procedure


$ CAUTION


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press and hold the “GROUP” button for at least 3 seconds.Thethirddigitfigurewillstarttoflash.Thisdigitindicatestheminimumamountofunitscontrolledbythiscontroller.Iftheaddressofthecontrollerisnotsetto“1”andthegroupdoesnotregister,thecontrollerbuttononlyindicatesthethirddigit.

INDVDL

ThirddigitSeconddigitFirstdigit

• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.

Thenumberofunitstobeconnectedisindicatedsequentially.Thisservestosetthemaximumnumberofunits.

INDVDL

• Press the “GROUP” button.Thefirstdigitflashesandthemaximumnumberofunitsisindicated INDVDL

• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Thenumberoftheunitstobeconnectedwhichexceedtheminimumnumberofunitsissequentiallyindicated.Thisservestosetthemaximumnumberofunits.

INDVDL

• Press and hold the “GROUP” button for at least 3 seconds.Thesettingofthegroupsisappliedandthecontrolreturnstonormalmode. INDVDL

NOTE

- If the “RESET” button is pressed or no other button is pressed for more than 30 seconds, the group registration mode will automatically exit to normal mode. (If this occurs, the group registration will not be set).

- Group registration cannot be carried out during unit operation. If this procedure is carried out, “NO FUNC.” will appear on the display.- Do no set the same unit no. when two or more controllers are connected. If you do, the “E002” alarm code may appear on the controller

with the highest address.You must then set the correct address no. on the controller with the “E002” alarm code.

Operation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

202TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2.4 Operation


UnitoperatingindicatorIndividualcontrolindicatorMultipleunitcontrolindicatorTimerindicatorEmergencystopindicatorOperationindicatorforeachunitDemandindicator“NoFunction”indicator,intheevenofamalfunction

MODECHANGE A/CH.STRG

TIMER OPTION GROUP

TEMP

CHECK

RESETDISP.MODE

RUN/STOP UNITSELECTION

EMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

OUTLET

SET

TEMP.

TEMP.

PR. MPa

CHECKABNMLLOCAL

Fig. 8 Model: CSC-5S

OperationmodeindicationIndicatestheoperationmodeselectedfortheindicatedgroup:“Cool”(cooling),“Heat”(heating)and“H.RCV”(heatrecovery)(notavailable).

Runindicator(redpilot).

“RUN/STOP”button.

“MODE”button(operationmodeselection).

“A/CH.STRG”button(air-conditioning/heatstorge).

“TIMER”button(timerselection).

“OPTION”buttonUsedforselectingthedifferentoptions.

Botón“GROUP”(paraajustedegrupos).

“MODE”button(buttonforchangingdisplay).

“TEMP”button(forsettinggroups).

“CHECK”buttonUsedforservicetasks.

“RESET”button(reset).

“UNITSELECTION”button.

TemperaturesettingindicatorInlet/outlettemperatureindicator“ABNML”alarmindicator“LOCAL”localindicator

Tab. 6

Operation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2.4.2. Remote controls

Individual remote control

-“INDVDL”appearsonthedisplaypanelduringthistypeofcontrol.Therearetwotypesofcontrolavailable.Oneisthegroupregistration(refertothe“Groupregistrationprocedure”section).Thiscontrolallowseachunittobecontrolled.Theothertypeissimultaneousgroupcontrol.Whentheunitbuttonispressed,theunitnumbersaremodified.“AA”indicatesalltheunits.

-Thecontentsaredifferentdependingontheunit(except“RUN”)andarenotdisplayedwhenunitno.“AA”isindicated.(Forexample,operation/heatstorage,temperaturesetting,local,etc.,mode).

-Theoptionscanbesetbyselectingthefollowingconfiguration.(Consulttheoptionssettingprocedure).Differential“ON/OFF”setting•••Option1.

Multiple unitcontrol

-“MULTI”appearsonthedisplaypanelduringthistypeofcontrol.The“ON/OFF”controlsforunitsconfiguredasgroupregisteredisautomaticallyactivatedbydetectingthetemperaturesettingandtheactualtemperature.(Ifthe“UNITSELECTION”buttonispressedduringthenormalmode,“NOFUNC.”willappearonthescreen).

-Thecontrolofupto8chillerunitsiscarriedoutbydetectingtheminimumwatertemperatureduringcoolingoperationsandthemaximumwatertemperatureduringheatingoperations,respectively.

-Fortheinlet(outlet)watertemperature,thechillerunitsarecontrolledbytheminimum/maximuminlet(outlet)watertemperaturedetectedontheunitsofthesamegroup.

-Theoptionscanbesetbyselectingthefollowingconfiguration:(Consult3.2.6.1.Externalinletandoutletfunction).Differential“ON/OFF”setting•••Option1.Inletoroutletwatertemperaturecontrolselection•••Option2.Selectionoftheavailabilityofthecapacitycontrolforthelastunittostop•••Option3.Selectionoftheavailabilityofthe“ON/OFF”controlofthepumpoftheunitstoppedbythethermostat•••Option4.

Tab. 7

NOTE

- This control function is selected by setting pin no. 1 of the DSW2 to “ON” or “OFF”. This setting is required before the units are energised. (This setting cannot be changed after energising the unit).

- If you need to change this setting, contact your local installer.

3.2.4.3. Operation procedure

I. Operation mode setting

“COOL”:Coldwatercoolingoperation“HEAT”:Hotwaterheatingoperation“H.RCV”(heatrecovery):Notavailable.• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.

NOTE

This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press the “MODE CHANGE” button.Theindicationchangesinthefollowingorderwitheachkeystroke:

COOL HEAT

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

Operation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

II. Selecting and monitoring a unit's status

This controller can control a maximum of 8 units individually or simultaneously. With this controller, the unit can be started up and its operational status can be controlled.

NOTE

The UNIT SELECTION buttons are used to select the unit, but those that are not registered in the group will not appear.

• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Whenthebuttonispressed,thesequenceoftheunitsischangesasshownbelow.AAselectsalltheunits.

NOTE


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

Number of the selected unit

Number of registered units

Thecurrentoperationstatusoftheselectedmodeisdisplayed.The“{”symbolshowstheunit'sstatus: -“OFF”: Stopped -“ON”: Operating -Flashing: AlarmThestatusindicatedbythe“RUN”pilotlight: -“OFF”: Allunitsstopped -“ON”: Morethanoneunitoperating -Flashing: Alarmformorethanoneunit

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

III. Setting the temperature

$ CAUTION

- Do not press the “CHECK” button.- The “CHECK” button is only used for service tasks.- If the check mode is accidentally accessed, press the “RESET” button to return to

the previous mode.

• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.

NOTE


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press the buttonSettherequiredtemperaturewiththe“TEMP”▲▼button,eachpressincreasesorreducesthetemperaturebyonedegree,thetemperaturesettingrangevariesdependingontheunittobeconfigured.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

NOTE

- The set temperature will change continuously if the button is held down.- If multiple unit control is selected and the “UNIT SELECTION” button is pressed, “NO FUNC.” will appear on the display.- The unit no. is always “AA” when all the units operate simultaneously in normal mode.

Operation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

205TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

IV. Procedure for changing the display mode


NOTE


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press the button “DISP. MODE”.Thesettingtemperatureindicationautomaticallychanges,asshownbelow.Theinformationonthedisplayvariesasfollows:

InletWaterLightOffOutletTemperatureLightOff

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

V. Operation procedure


NOTE


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press the"RUN/STOP" button.Theselectedunitisstartedorstoppedwiththisbutton.If“AA”isselected,alltheunitsstartorstopatthesametime.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

NOTE

- The instructions above show an example of unit no. 4 in operation.To operate another unit, use the same procedure. If you want to select all units, select “AA”.

- When power is reconnected to the CSC-5S after a power failure, the chiller unit will stop working for safety reasons.Consequently, the operation procedure must be carried out again after connecting the power supply.

- If the chiller unit is restarted by the CSC-5S after reconnecting the power supply, reboot the chiller unit and wait for more than 30 sec. after the power supply is reconnected.

- The CSC-5S unit automatically checks the connection after the power is connected. (Unit nos. 1 to 8 are displayed on the liquid crystal display). During the connection check, wait a moment until CSC-5S operation is available.

VI. Timer operation

Thisisthefunctionusedtosetthe“ON/OFF”operationstofunctionviathedetectionofthesignalfromtheoptionalcontroltimerconnected(PSC-5T).• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.

NOTE


INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Press the “TIMER” button.Whenthe“TIMER”buttonispressed,itactivatesthetimerinthesetunit,whichwillstarttodependingontheschedulesetonthetimer.The“TIMER”indicationappearsontheLCD.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

NOTE

Set the same address number for the remote control and the control timer.

Operation

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

VII. LCD screen indications

• Normal indications

“LOCAL”:“LOCAL”appearsonthedisplaywhenthechillerunitissettolocal.Settingscannotbechangedfromthecontrollerwhenthisindicationison.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

“DEMAND”:Functionunavailable

“EMG. (Emergency) STOP:“EMG.STOP”appearsonthedisplaywhenitdetectsaninputsignalinthecontroller'sport2.

EMG. STOP INDVDL

SET TEMP.

• Alarm indicationsAbnormal condition:-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononanyoftheunit,theoperationpilotlight“{”thatindicates

thestatusofthatunitwillflash.-The"ABNL"indicationwillbedisplayedontheLCDscreen.-Theunitno.,alarmcodeand

nominalindicationareshownalternately.-Ifthealarmcodeoccursinmultiplecontrolunits,theunitno.andalarmcodeoftheunitwith

thelowestno.aredisplayedsequentially.-Checkthealarmcodeandcontacttheinstaller.

INDVDL

SET TEMP.

ABNML

Power failure:-Alltheindicationsareoff.-Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailure,itwillnotrestartautomatically,evenwhenthepowerisrestored.Followthe

start-upproceduresagain.-Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailureoflessthan2seconds,itwillrestartautomaticallywhenthepowerisrestored.Noise:-Alltheindicationshavedisappearedandinsomecasestheunitstops.Thismeansthatthemicroprocessorhasactivated

toprotecttheequipmentfromthenoise.Followthestart-upproceduresagain.

Optional functions

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

207TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S


External inlet and outlet function

NOTE

- With individual control, only option no. 1 is available.- If the RESET button is pressed or no other button is pressed for more than 30 seconds in the option setting

procedures, the option setting mode will change back to the normal mode without setting the options. (In this case the setting is not saved).

- The option setting is not available during operation. If the OPTION button is pressed during operation, NO FUNC. will appear on the display

- If the UNIT SELECTION button is pressed during multiple unit control, NO FUNC. will appear on the display.

Setting optional functions

• Press the UNIT SELECTION button.Selecttheunittobeset.

NOTE


MULTI

• Press and hold the “OPTION” button for at least 3 seconds.Thefirstoptionalfunctionsettingdigitflashes.

MULTI

• Press the “OPTION” button.Repeatedlypressthe“OPTION”buttonuntiltheno.oftherequiredoptionisindicatedandthenpressthe“TEMP”button.Thesecondoptionalfunctionsettingdigitflashes.

NOTE

The numbers of the available optional functions are shown in table 7.

MULTI

• Press the “OPTION” button.Repeatedlypressthe“OPTION”buttonuntiltheno.oftherequiredoptionisindicatedandthenpressthe“TEMP”button.Foroptionno.2,select“INLET”or“OUTLET”.

NOTE

The numbers of the available optional functions are shown in Tab.8.

MULTI

• Press and hold the “OPTION” the button for at least 3 seconds.Theoptionalfunctionselectedwillbesaved.

MULTI

Option no.

Setting Setting contentSetting

sentIndividual

controlMultiple unit

control

Option 12 Set the differential at 2 degrees

and and� Set the differential at � degrees� Set the differential at � degrees

Option 2Inlet Inlet temperature control and

andOutlet Inlet temperature control

Option �0 Available for capacity control of the unit that stops

operating last and

and

1 Unavailable for capacity control of the unit that stops operating last

Option �0 The pump starts up after thermostat turns off. and

and1 The pump stops after the thermostat turns off.*

Tab. 8

Optional functions and Maintenance and repair

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

208TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

* The water pump continues to operate even in the thermostat off state.

This controller (CSC-5S) has a 2 input and 2 output channel, connected as follows:

Pin1and2ofCN2 Externalinput1 Simultaneous operation and stoppage input (level signal)

Pin2and3ofCN2 Externalinput2 Emergency stop input (level signal)

Pin1and2ofCN3 Externaloutput1 Simultaneous operation output (level signal)

Pin1and3ofCN3 Externaloutput2 Simultaneous alarm output (level signal)

CN2321

CN3321

Cablewithconnector(option):PCC-1A

InletcontactAnovoltage

RYa

Cableofmorethan0.5mm2

(fieldsupply,maxlenght:70m)

Fig. 9

Use the optional wiring assembly with the connector (PCC-1A) to connect the external inputs and outputs. Omron MY type relays are recommended for the external output.


3.2.6.1. Chiller unit checking procedure

The check mode indicates � types of contents:- Details on the operating status, the chiller unit no. etc., are shown on the display.

Consult table 8- The contents of abnormal stoppages with safety device activation are indicated with up to a max. of 10 details.- The capacity control status is indicated.

I. Changing to check mode

- Press the “CHECK” button for more than � seconds, the control changes to the check mode and indicates several details (see below)

- On pressing the “CHECK” button the indication changes, as shown below:

VariousData AlarmHistory CapacityControlState


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

“Various Data” indication

- Pressing the “TEMP” button will display the following data:

Indication code

Indication contents Unit Comments

C1Pd ~ C�Pd Discharge pressure. MPa

Indicates a máx. of � details on the chilling circuit.

C1Ps ~ C�Ps Suction pressure. MPaC1td ~ C�td Discharge gas temperature. °CC1ts ~ C�ts Suction gas temperature. °CC1tr ~ C�tr Liquid refrigerant temperature. °CCEL Inlet water temperature. °CCoL Outlet water temperature. °CCcoL Individual water pipe outlet temperature. °C The details shown on the display will

depend on the chiller unit. tSC Chilled water temperature setting. °CtSH Hot water temperature setting. °CtSCd Analogue chilled water temperature setting. °CtSHd Analogue hot water temperature setting. °CdF Differential setting. °CtA Ambient temperature. °CCrno Chiller unit ROM no.CvEr Chiller unit version no.rno Controller ROM no.

Tab. 9

NOTE

On pressing the “TEMP”▲ button once, the indication code is displayed, and when pressed again, its value is displayed. If the other button▼ is pressed, it will change in the opposite order.

- Press “UNIT SELECTION” to select the unit to be set; the indications always start with C1Pd.

III. “Alarm History” indication

- Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button to see the previous alarms, up to a maximum of 10 details.

IV. “Capacity Control State” indication

- The capacity control status is indicated.- Individual control: The capacity of each unit is indicated when the “UNIT SELECTION” button is pressed.- Multiple unit control: The total capacity of the group is indicated.

NOTE

If you press the “RESET” button or if you do not press any button for 30 seconds, the control returns to normal operation mode.


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

210TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2.6.2. Controller reboot procedure

I. Reboot procedure


1

Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.UNIT

SELECTIONMODE

5

NOTE


3

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,inself-checkmode.


1

âPR.

LOCAL

For1second

2

âOUTLET

ABNML

For1second

3

âEMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

TEMP.

CHECK

For1second

4

â

SET TEMP.

MPa

For1second

5

âEMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

OUTLET

SET

TEMP.

TEMP.

PR. MPa

CHECKABNMLLOCAL


6

â


UNITSELECTION

MODE

5

Goto5

4 Ifthecombinationisnotentered,thetestwillbecompleteandthescreenwillgoblank,itcanthenbeusedagain.

5

TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,instart-upmode.

No. LCDindication Action

1

âAfterpressingthethree

buttons

2

âPressRESET

3

âThe“EEPROM”iserased

and0

4

âThesystemwillstartup

NOTE

In�this�condition:Press�“CHECK”�if�start-up�is�not�required,�and�the�system�will�return�to�operation�mode.


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

211TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

3.2.6.3. Self-check mode

I. Changing to self-check mode

$ CAUTION

Switch off all the groups of units.


1

Self-checkmodewillstart,andthefollowingsequenceofimageswillappearonscreenPressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.

UNITSELECTION

MODE

5 NOTE


3

LCD(liquidcrystaldisplay)check:thisiscarriedoutautomatically.


1

âPR.

LOCAL

For1second

2

âOUTLET

ABNML

For1second

3

âEMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

TEMP.

CHECK

For1second

4

â

SET TEMP.

MPa

For1second

5

âEMG. STOP

MULTI

INDVDL

INLET

OUTLET

SET

TEMP.

TEMP.

PR. MPa

CHECKABNMLLOCAL


6

â

4• RUN pilot light check. TheRUNpilotlightwillflashtwice.

5• Button input and DSW check. PressallthebuttonsandsettheDSWtoONorOFFalternately,checkingthatthenumber"29"isindicatedasthenormalinputnumber.

6• Transmission circuit check. Thischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.

7

• External output check. Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN3.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -SwitchonLED1for2seconds -SwitchonLED2for2seconds -SwitchoffLED1andLED2for2seconds -SwitchonLED1andLED2 (TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

212TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

8

• External input check.Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN2.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -Whenbutton1issettoON,LED1willbeON -Whenbutton1issettoOFFandbutton2issettoON,LED2willbeON -Whenbuttons1and2aresettoON,LED1andLED2willbeON -(TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).

9• EEPROM check(Consult3.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure)

10• IC check for the control timerThischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.

LED1

LED2

CN3

1

2

3

Resistance

CN2

1

2

3

Button2

Button1

Fig. 10


CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S







PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmcolourbeige

(2twistedcables) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCB

sideRemotecontrol

side


PRC-15E1 15 TPC

PRC-20E1 20 TPC

*PRC-30E1 30 TPC




This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords


PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB.



300mm(approx.)

Tab. 11

CSC-5S

Technical catalogue

21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

CSC-5S

Table of contents

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

215TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3. PSC-5T...................................................................................................217

3.3.1. GeneraldetailsSelectionadvantages....................................................217


3.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................218

3.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2183.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2193.3.3.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2203.1.3.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................2233.3.3.5.DIPswitchadjustment........................................................................................224

3.3.4. Operation................................................................................................225



PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

General details

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

217TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

3.3. PSC-5T

3.3.1. General details Selection advantages

The PSC-5T is a programmable weekly timer that can be used together with other remote controls that do not have the a built in weekly timer option, so that when they are connected they are fully timer controlled.


- The 7 days of the week and the start/stop times can be scheduled up to � times a day with the PSC-5T timer.

- The remote control can be deactivated during the stoppage time (if it is used with the PSC-5S and PC-P1HE).

- It has two types of weekly schedules (A and B), which can easily be changed for winter and summer periods.

- All the settings are digitally displayed allowing the operation and settings to be checked easily.

- The power failure safety function prevents the timer from stopping during a power cut (even if it lasts for weeks).


NOTE

This remote control can be used with a second remote in order to enable the timer function.

This remote control is 100% compatible with the following controls:

Remote control Central control Wireless remote control

PC-P1HE PSC-5S PC-RLH8PC-P2HTE PC-RLH9

PC-P5H PC-RLH11

PC-RLH13

Tab. 1


PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

218TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T


46

1212012

0

17

83.5

>ABS<

HOUR-MINUTESET/MONITOR

Fig. 1. PSC-5T central control dimensions

3.3.3. Installation






$ CAUTION




Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T





Tab. 2

I. Space necessary for the installation


Atleast50mm

Fig. 2

II. Prior to installation

NOTE

Unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.

Check the content and the number of accessories in the package.


Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation.


Cable(1m) 1 Forremotecontrol-timerconnection.

Tab. 3

Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

220TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T


1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section, as indicated below:

Screwdriver

Bracket

Central Control

Groove

Groove

BracketScrewdriver

Bracket

Indentpart

Fig. 3

2. Secure the timer to the bracket and connect the cable as illustrated below.


1. Fix the bracket to the wall using the screws supplied

Screws(accessories)

Attachthebracketwiththemarkupwards

Fig. 4

2. Select and cut the knockout hole through which to pass the cable.

Determinthepositionofthewiringanddrilloneoftheholesmarkedwith*inthediagram.Ifusinganaccessorycable,drillaholeonthebottom.

Fig. 5

Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

221TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

�. Insert the cable through the hole/s.

Attachthebandtothecableinsidetheknockouthole Cable

Cabletie(fieldsupply)

Twistedpaircable

Cable

Cabletie(fieldsupply)

Accessorycable

Fig. 6

NOTE

Strip the protective insulation from the accessory cable supplied, if used.

�. Connect the cable to the PCB plate connector or to the terminal.

Connector

Terminalboard

Fig. 7

5. Fix the timer to the bracket.

Step1:Insertthehooksofthetimerintotheholesonthetopofthebracket.

Step2:Pushthebottompartofthetimertowardsthebracket.

Step3:Thetimerwillclickwhenitissecuredinplace.Checkthatthefourhooksarecorrectlyinserted.

Fig. 8

Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

222TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

II. If using an electrical box

There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one remote control unit (without cover).

- Electrical box for 2 remote control units (without cover). - Electrical box for one remote control unit (with cover). - Electrical box for 2 remote control units (with cover). - Output box (with cover).

1. Prepare the electrical box.

2. Pass the cable through the wall duct.

Fig. 9

�. Attach the bracket to the electrical box.

Screws(accessories)

Attachthebracketwiththemarkupwards

Fig. 10

�. Connect the cable to the PCB connector or to the terminals.

Connector

Terminalboard

Fig. 11

5. Fix the timer to the bracket

Step1:Insertthehooksofthetimerintotheholesonthetopofthebracket.

Step2:Pushthebottompartofthetimertowardsthebracket.

Step3:Thetimerwillclickwhenitissecuredinplace.Checkthatthefourhooksarecorrectlyinserted.

Fig. 12

Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T


This section explains how to electrically connect the timer to another remote control or to the central station.

$ CAUTION

- Use a twisted pair cable (1P - 0.75 mm2) as a transmission cable to avoid possible communication errors. If the cable exceeds 30m in length, use:

- Shielded pair cable (connected to earth protection on one side). - Normal pair cable.- The transmission cable and the remote control cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.

I. Timer combined with PC-P1HE or PC-P5H or wireless remote control receiver

Indoorunit

PC-P1HEPSC-5T

Transmissioncablebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits(H-LINK)

Twistedpaircable1P-0.75mm2(max.100m)fieldsupply

Fig. 13

II. Timer combined with PSC-5S central control

NOTE

- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one PSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different


PSC-5T PSC-5STB2Connector

Outdoorunit

Indoorunits

Controls

Accessorycable(1m)

Toothercentralstations

220Vcaor240VpowersupplyCN1

Twistedpaircable1P-0.75mm2(max.100m)

AvailableforH-Linkconnection(toconnecttotheindoorortotheoutdoorunitterminalboards1and2)

Fig. 14

Installation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

3.3.3.5. DIP switch adjustment

Set the PCB board DIP switches as indicated below.

NOTE

The switches settings are deactivated at the factory.

DSW1

DSW2

Fig. 15

I. DIP switch adjustment

Pin no. Setting contentDSW setting

CommentsOFF ON

DSW1

1

SetaddressConsultthefollowingtable

Thesettingneedonlybemadewhenthecentralstation(PSC-5S)isusedincombination.Settheaddressofthecentralstationthatyouwishtocontrol.2

3

4 Foruseinconjunctionwithanotherremotecontrol

ExceptPC-P1HE

PC-P1HESetpinno.4toONifusingthePC-P1HEremotecontrolincombination.

DSW2

1Settheremotecontrolfunctionallimitafterthescheduledstoppagetime

Settingunavailable

Settingavailable

ThissettingisonlyavailablewhenusedinconjunctionwiththePSC-5ScentralstationorthePC-P1HEremotecontrol.Theremotecontrolswillnotfunctionafterthescheduledstoppagetimeisset,andwillonlybecomeavailableafterthestart-upcommand.

2 Foruseinconjunctionwithanotherremotecontrol

PSC-5SExceptPSC-5S

Setpinno.2accordingtotheremotecontrolusePSC-5S.

3 Nofunction - - Donotchangethe“OFF”setting.

4 Nofunction - - Donotchangethe“OFF”setting.

Tab. 4

II. Address setting with DSW1


Tab. 5

Operation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

225TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

3.3.4. Operation


Currenttimeindicator.

Fig. 16. Model: PSC-5T

TimesettingandholidayindicationIndicatesthe“SET”or“MONITOR”operationmodeandtheholiday.

Currentdayindications.

Rundayindication.Thisindicatorappearswhenadayisset.

Runindicator(greenpilotlight).

“SET/MONITOR”operationmodeselectionbuttonWhenthisbuttonispressed,theremotecontroltimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthesymbolwillflash.Ifpressedagain,"SET"modewillswitchoffandthesystemwillchangefromsettingmodetomonitormode.

A/Bsettingmodeselectionbutton.Pressthisbuttontoselectthemodeyouwishtoswitchon(AorB).Therearetwo(2)modes(AandB)setfortheweeklyschedule.Eachmodecanbesetto“ON”/“OFF”three(3)timesaday,sevendaysaweek.

Holidaysettingbutton.Bypressingthisbutton,withthetimerinsettingmode("SET"),the"HOLI"indicationwillappearandtheselecteddaywillbesetasaholiday.Pressingthebuttonagaincancelstheholidaysetting.

Currenttimesettingbutton.Bypressingthisbutton,the"SET"indicatorandsymbolwillflash,allowingtheusertosetthecurrenttime.

Weekdaysettingbutton.Withthetimerinsettingmode("SET"),usethisbuttontoselecttheweekday.Bypressingthisbutton,thesymbolmovesintheorder“Sun>Moon>...>Sat”.Pressing"DAY"after"Sat"willselectallmarks.Ifpressedagain,thesymbolwillreturntoSun.

"RUNDAY"settingbutton.Pressing“RUNDAY”,willsettheselecteddayastherundayandthesymbolwillappear.Ifpressedagain,itwillswitchoffandcanceltheselectedday.

“SELECT”settingselectionbutton.Bypressing“SELECT”,theusercanselectelement1,2or3forboth"ONTIME"and"OFFTIME".

“ON/OFFTIMER”settingselectionbutton.Whenthetimerisin"SET"mode,pressing"ON/OFFTIMER",willswitchthetimertothe"ON/OFF"settingmodeandthe"ONTIME"indicationwillflash.

Settingtime“CANCEL”button.Bypressingthisbuttonwhenthetimerisset,the"ONTIME"or"OFFTIME"indicationwilldisappear.

“OK”button.Pressingthisbuttonacceptstheselectedsettingprocess.

“HOUR-MINUTE”settingbutton.Pressingorwiththetimerinsettingmode("SET")adjuststhehoursandminutes.

“ONTIME”and“OFFTIME”settingindication.Indicatesthesettingconditionsfortheselectedday.

Indicationofweeklyschedulemode(AorB).

Tab. 6

Operation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

3.3.4.2. Operation mode selection procedure

I. Setting the current date and time


$ CAUTION


Thediagramontherightshowsthecurrenttimesetto0:00AMon“Sunday”.(Whenthepowerisswitchedon,thecurrenttimeisnotset).

• Press and hold the “PRESENT” button for at least 3 seconds.Thescreenwillswitchtothecurrenthoursettingmode,andtheSETindicatorand▼symbolwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsacaseinwhichneitherthe"ON"timenor"OFF"timeareset.

• Set the current day by pressing the “DAY” button.Pressthe“OK”buttonaftersettingthecurrentday;the▼signwillswitchonandthetimeindicationwillflash.ThediagramontherightwillshowthedaysettingasFriday.

• Set the current time by pressing “HOUR/MINUTE” or .Pressthe"OK"buttonaftersettingthecurrenttime;theminuteindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthehoursetto5PM.

NOTE

12:00AM is shown as 00:00PM

• Set the current minutes by pressing “HOUR/MINUTE” or .Press"OK"aftersettingthecurrentminutes;thecurrentdayandtimewillbesetandthetimesettingmodewillswitchtomonitormode.Theminuteindicationwillswitchonand"SET"willgooff.Thediagramontherightshowstheminutesettingat15.

II. Changing weekly schedule mode (A or B)

NOTE

- There are 2 modes (A and B) set for the weekly schedule.- For each mode, three run times and three stoppage times can be set per day.- They are used for selecting the mode to be set and used.- Modes A and B can be used to set weekly or seasonal operating schedules.

• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button.Theremotecontroltimerwillswitchtosettingmodeandthe"SET”indicationwillappear.

• Press the “A/B” button.Settingmodeischanged(fromAtoB)bypressingA/B.ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.

• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button."SET"modeisswitchedoffandsettingmodeswitchestomonitormode.

Operation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

227TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

III. Time settings for: On/Off

• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button.Theremotecontroltimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsanexampleoftheswitchtosettingmode.

• Select schedule mode A or B by pressing "A/B".

• Select the day of the week on which to set the “ON/OFF” controlWhen"DAY"ispressed,theflashingsymbol▼willmoveinthefollowingsequence: “Sun>Moon> ...>Sat”Bypressing"DAY"after"Sat",all▼symbolswillflash(fromSuntoSat).Inthiscase,thesettingisthesameforalldaysoftheweek.Bypressingthe"DAY"buttononcemore,theflashingsymbol▼ willreturnto“Sun”.• Press the "ON/OFF TIME" button.Thetimerwillswitchto"ON/OFF"timesettingmodeandthe"ONTIME"indicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowstheswitchto"ON/OFF"timesettingmode.

• Select setting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing "SELECT".When"SELECT"ispressed,thetimeindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsetting2.

• Set the "ON TIME" by pressing the "HOUR/MINUTE" button or.Aftersettingthetimeindication,press"OK";the"ONTIME"minuteindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto1PM:--

• Set the "ON TIME" minutes by pressing "HOUR/MINUTE" or .Aftersettingtheminuteindication,press"OK";the"OFFTIME"timeindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto1:00PM.

• Set the "OFF TIME”.Followthesameprocedureasthatusedtosettheontime.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto5:00PM.

• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.Thediagramontherightshowsthecurrentdaysettingcondition.

NOTE

By pressing this button when the timer is set, the "ON TIME" or "OFF TIME" indication will disappear.

Operation

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

228TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

IV. Setting the Run day

• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.Thetimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.

• Select mode A or B by pressing "A/B".ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.

• Set the run day by pressing the "DAY" button.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".

• Press the "RUN DAY" buttonTheselecteddaywillbesetastherundayandthesymbolwillswitchonfortheselectedday.Bypressing“RUNDAY”again,therundaysettingwillbecancelledandthesymbolwillswitchoff.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".

• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.

V. Holiday setting

NOTE

This setting temporarily cancels the operating schedule.The scheduled operation will be cancelled only for the day set as a holiday, afterwards the scheduled operation will once again be available. This function is used in the event of an irregular holiday.

• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.Thetimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.

• Select schedule mode A or B by pressing "A/B".ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.

• Select the day to be set as a holiday by pressing the "DAY" button.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".

• Press the "HOLIDAY" button.The"HOLI"indicationwillswitchonandtheselecteddaywillbesetasaholiday.Bypressing"HOLIDAY"again,theholidaysettingiscancelled.

• Press "SET/MONITOR".The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.

$ CAUTION

If the current day is set as a holiday, the holiday setting will be active from that moment on and the programmed mode is cancelled until the following day. In this case, the same day of the subsequent week will not be a holiday.

Operation and Remote control optional accessories

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

VI. Checking the setting content

• Press the "DAY" button in monitor modeThe▼ symbolmovesandthedaysettingcontentisindicatedwiththe▼symbol.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".

$ CAUTION

- The remote control has a built-in backup battery, making the clock function available for 2 weeks in the event of power failure. If the power failure should last for more than 2 weeks, the current time will need to be reset.

- The "RUN" indicator will switch on at the "ON" time and switch off at the "OFF" time. If the indoor unit is switched on or off from the control station or remote control used in conjunction with the timer, the "RUN" indicator will not change.

- If the "RUN" indicator is flashing, this indicates an abnormal condition on the timer. Check that the cable connections and DIP switch settings are correct.If the "RUN" indicator continues to flash after the check, contact your dealer or HITACHI supplier.

$ NOTE

- When an on or off order is sent from the timer, it may take around 15 seconds for the order to take effect.- During setting mode, on/off orders cannot be sent to the units.- Once the setting is complete, activate the timer monitor mode. (After remaining in setting mode for 3 minutes,

the timer will switch automatically to monitor mode).- When using the central station timer (PSC-5S), the settings made through the central station are required.







PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB.


Connector (“XARP-�” of JST)

�00 mm (approx.)

Tab. 7

PSC-5T

Technical catalogue

2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

PSC-5T

Table of contents

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. COMPUTERISEDCENTRALREMOTECONTROLS............................233

4.1. HARC-BXE............................................................................................233

4.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................233


4.1.2. Installation..............................................................................................241


4.1.3. Operation................................................................................................247

4.1.3.1.Testmode...........................................................................................................2474.1.3.2.BMSconnection.................................................................................................2484.1.3.3.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................248


4.1.4.1.HARC-BXEself-check......................................................................................2494.1.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2504.1.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................251

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4. COMPUTERISED CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLS

4.1. HARC-BX E



I. General features

-Thedifferentsystemswithinbuildingssuchaslights,alarms,airconditioning,...,canbefullycontrolledbyjustoneBMS.

-GatewayinterfacewithBMSLonWorks®systems(installationswithintelligentcontrolorBMS).

-HARC-BXEallowsthecontrolofupto5settingpointsandtheremotesupervisionofamaximumof9values.WiththeHARC-BXEconnectedtoaH-LINKnetwork,amaximumof8outdoorunitscanbeusedandupto64indoorunitscontrolled.

-Amaximumof8HARC-BXEcanbeconnectedtothesameH-Link.

-TheHARC-BXEcentralremotecontrolcanbeconnectedtoanypointoftheH-Linksystem.


This control should be used together with the remote controls installed for the indoor units, and is compatible with the remote controls listed, bearing in mind that there is no priority between the controls and the HARC-BX:

Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9PC-P5H PC-RLH8

PC-RLH11

Tab. 1



RCI-FSGE RPC-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E

RPI-FSGE RPF-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E

RPI-FSGE1 RPFI-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R

RPC-FSGE RPK-FSG2M* RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E

RPF-FSG RCD-FSG(1/2) RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E

RPFI-FSG RCI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSNM RPFI-G7E

RPK-FSGM* RPI-FSG2Ei RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCD-FSG RPC-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E

RCI-FSG2E RPF-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M

RPI-FSG2E RPFI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*

RPIM-FSNE

RCIM-FSNE

Tab. 2


The HARC-BX E remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status. HARC-BX provides the necessary information for the BMS control to easily check the system's operation in addition to the alarms when they occur.

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4.1.1.3. System configuration

The following figure shows the internal configuration of the BMS connection used by the HARC-BX E.This manual describes the HARC-BX E in terms of the rest of equipment necessary to assemble the system, see the enclosed installation manual.

Monitoringequipment

RangeprovidedbyHitachi

LonWorks®*Network

HARC-BXE HARC-BXE

Outdoorunit Outdoorunit

OutdoorunitOutdoorunit



* LonWorks® is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the USA and other countries

Fig. 1

$ CAUTION

Make sure that the shielded cable is earthed.

I. HARC-BX E unit components

1

2

3

4

Fig. 2

Power supply terminal to connect a AC220~2�0V power supply

Earthing terminal.

Terminal board for the transmission of the unit to connect the H-Link

Terminal board for the upper system, to connect the transmission cable for the upper monitoring system

II. Control panel components

MCLR LON- SERV.AC AC E

LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK

LON H-LINKLON H-LINK

Fig. 3

PSW (Push Switch) No. 1 (M.CLR): Press the button to check the quantity of connected units.

7-segment display (1*): This indicates the current HARC-BX E status.

PSW No. 2 (LON-SERV): Press the button (PSW) to transmit the Neuron ID. (Service pin)

8P DSW (DIP Switch) No. 1 (S201) (2*): Setting the system of HARC-BX E DIP switches.

¥ 8P DSW No. 2 (S202) (�*): DIP switch (DSW) for setting the functions of the HARC-BX E.

¦ Power supply LED (PWR): The light is ON when electricity is supplied.

§ Transmission LED (H-L): Transmission status with H-LINK

¨ Upper monitoring system transmission LED (LON): Transmission status with the upper monitoring equipment

(1*)7-segmentdisplay:Readthe“Checkmode”and“Indicationofabnormalconditions”sectionsfordetailsonthe7-segmentdisplay.

(2*)8PDSWNo.1S201:Readthe“DIPswitchadjustment”sectionforfurtherinformationandforHARC-BXEfunctions.

(3*)8PDSWNo.2.S202:Readthe“DIPswitchadjustment”section.8PDSWNo.1andNo.2areusedfortheself-check.Forfurtherdetails,refertothe“HARC-BXEself-check”section.

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

III. HARC-BX E specifications

■ Hardware specifications

Element Specification

Powersupply AC240V±10%(50/60Hz)

Energyconsumption 30W(max)

Externaldimensions Width:240mm,height:285mm,depth:128.5mm(Installedinsidethebox)

Weight 2.3kg

Installationconditions Indoor

Temperatureconditions 0~45°C

Humidityconditions 10~80%(Nodew)

Tab. 3

■ Telecommunication specifications for monobloc air conditioning


Communicationunit Monoblocairconditioning

Communicationscable Non-polar,2wiresystem

Telecommunicationssystem Half-duplextelecommunications

Synchronoussystem Asynchronouscommunicationsystem

Telecommunicationsspeed 9,600bps

Cablelength 1,000m(totallength)

Connectionquantity OptionTypeA:Max.amountofunits:64OptionTypeA:Max.amountofunits:32

Tab. 4

■ Telecommunication specifications for the upper system


Communicationunit Uppermonitoringequipment

Transmissionprotocol LonTalk(*)protocol

Accessmethod PersistentCSMA/CDsystemplanned

Codingsystem DifferentialManchesterCode


Maximumcablelength 500m(totalbuslength)

(*)“LonTalk”isan“EchelonCorporation”trademarkintheUSAandothercountries.

Tab. 5

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

IV. Communication with LonWorks interface

■ HARC-BX(A)The HARC-BX(A) is a LonWorks interface designed for cases where only the control of the units is required and there is no need for unit operation monitoring.

Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolof: ·Upto64indoorunitsand8outdoorunits ·Upto8interfacesperH-Link

a.HARC-BX(A)communicationmode: Thefollowingvariablescanbecontrolledandmonitoredineachoftheinterface's8PCBs:

NetworkvariablesVersion1.0A

nviOnOff_n

nviMode_n

nviSetPoint_n

nviFanSpeed_n

nviProtect_n

nviAllOnOff

nvoOnOff_n

nvoInletTemp_n

7Points/Unit

1Commonpoint

Configurationproperties

nciMaxSendTimenciMinSendTime

Remote

control

Monitor

x8(eachPCB)

Fig. 4

b.XIFfilevariables

SVNT number

Unit number

Variable number

TypeLONMARK SNVT No.

Description Condition Note

0 0 nviOnOff_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUN

Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link

1 0 nviMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting

1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)

2 0 nviSetPoint_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC

3 0 nviFanSpeed_0 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting

Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High

Byte2:State0(Fixed)

4 0 nviProtect_0 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled

State1:RCSdisabled

5 0 nvoOnOff_0 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)

Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.

6 0 nvoInletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC


State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled

Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) file variables list (continued on the next page)

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E






State1=RUN



1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)




Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled





State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled





State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled





State1=RUN





38 5 nviFanSpeed_5 SNVT_switch 95 FanspeedsettingByte1:Value1:Low,

Value2:Middle,Value3:HighByte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled




Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) file variables list (continued on the next page)

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E



State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled





State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled




56 Outdoor nviAllOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUN57 nciMaxSendTime 107 Theuseof

standardvaluesisrecommended(donotchange)

58 nciMinSendTime 107

59 nciPwrUp 107

Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) XIF file variables list

■ HARC-BX(B)The HARC-BX(B) is a LonWorks interface designed for cases that require a more detailed control of the units, in addition to complete unit operation monitoring functions.

Thisinterfaceallowsusto: ·Controlupto32indoorunitsand8outdoorunits ·Connectupto8interfacesperH-Link

a.HARC-BX(B)communicationmode:

Thefollowingvariablescanbecontrolledandmonitoredineachoftheinterface's8PCBs:

NetworkvariablesVersion1.0B

nviOnOff_n

nviMode_n

nviSetPoint_n

nviFanSpeed_n

nviProhibit_n

nvoOnOff_n

nvoInletTemp_n

14Points/Unit

2Commonpoints



Remote

control

Monitor

x4(eachPCB)

nviAllOnOff

nviLouvre_n

nvoMode_n

nvoSetPoint_n

nvoFanSpeed_n

nvoLouvre_n

nvoAlarm_n

nvoOutletTemp_n

nvoAmbientTemp

Fig. 5

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

SVNT number

Unit number

Variable name TypeLONMARK SNVT No.



State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)

4 0 nviLouver_0 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,

5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)


State1:RCSdisabled



7 0 nvoMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting


8 0 nvoSetPoint_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC

9 0 nvoFanSpeed_0 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting


Byte2:State0(Fixed)

10 0 nvoLouver_0 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,


11 0 nvoAlarmDescr_0 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription.

3rdbyte0.12 0 nvoInletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC13 0 nvoOutletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC


State1=RUN





17 1 nviFanSpeed_1 SNVT_switch 95 FanspeedsettingByte1:Value1:Low,

Value2:Middle,Value3:HighByte2:State0(Fixed)




State1:RCSdisabled








Byte2:State0(Fixed)





Tab. 7 HARC-BX(B) file variables list (continued on the next page)

General details

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E



State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)




State1:RCSdisabled








Byte2:State0(Fixed)






State1=RUN







Byte2:State0(Fixed)




State1:RCSdisabled








Byte2:State0(Fixed)



53 3 nvoAlarmDescr_3 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription

3rdbyte0.54 3 nvoInletTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC55 3 nvoOutletTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC56 Outdoor nvoAmbientTemp SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC

57 Outdoor nviAllOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUN58 nciMaxSendTime 107 Theuseof

standardvaluesisrecommended(donotchange)

59 nciMinSendTime 107

60 nciPwrUp 107

Tab. 7 HARC-BX(B) XIF file variables list

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4.1.2. Installation






$ CAUTION





NOTE

- Bear in mind the safety summary warnings when selecting the installation site.- The installation site should be located in a place with an earthing connection.

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E


1. Install the HARC-BX E, placing the screwed terminal board on the right-hand side.

Upperview Sideview

Lower Horizontalinstallation

OK X OK

Correct Incorrect Correct

Fig. 6

2. Fix the HARC-BX E to the wall with 4 M4 field supply screws.

Fig. 7


$ CAUTION

- All wiring work must be done in accordance with local regulations and the instructions of the electricity company.- A qualified electrician should carry out the electrical wiring.- Adjust the electrical leakage detector switch in accordance with local regulations.

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

I. Type of wiring

1. The wiring for the HARC-BX E depends on the components connected. The HARC-BX E should be installed between the power supply, the monitoring equipment, the mono bloc air conditioning and the earthing connection.

2. Wiring methodAC100/240VPowersource

HARC-BXE

Monitoringequipment

Monoblocairconditioning Monoblocairconditioning

Fig. 8

No. Connection equipment Wiring specifications

Powersupplywiring AC100/240V2mm2shieldedwith2cores

Earthingcable Accordingtolocalregulations

Monitoringequipmentwiring LonWork*networkcable

Signalcablebetweenunits1P-0.75mm2shieldedpairortwistedandshieldedpaircable

*LonWorknetworkcable:UsethecablerecommendedbyEchelonCo.,Ltd.andfollowthemonitoringequipmentmanufacturer'sinstructions.

Tab. 8

NOTE

For further information, consult the manual supplied by Echelon Co., Ltd. “FTT·10A transceiver user guide”.

By way of a reference for the user, the following table describes the types of signal cables and their characteristics.

CableCable

diameter/ AWG

Electrical resistanceW/

Km

Capacitance hF/Km

% Vprop of the speed of

lightBelden85102,one/twistedpair,numberofcores19/29,withoutshielding,150ºC

1.3mm/16 28 56 62

Belden8471,one/twistedpair,numberofcores19/29,withoutshielding,60ºC

1.3mm/16 28 72 55

LevelVI22AWG,twistedpair,onecore,withoutshielding 0.65mm/22 106 49 67

JY(St)Y2×2×0.8,onecore,shielded,spiral4cabletwisted 0.8mm/20.4 73 98 41

TIA568ACategory5,24AWQ,twistedpair 0.51mm/24 168 46 58

Tab. 9

NOTE

If a shielded cable is used, it should be connected via a metal film resistor, with a rating of 470 kW 1/4 W (vatios), and a tolerance of less than 10% to prevent the generation of static charges.

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

II. Electrical wiring connection

1. Turn off the main electric switch connected to the cable of the HARC-BX E in order to connect the cable.

2. Wire in accordance with the following table.

Section No. *

Wiring method Comments

Electricpowerline

100/240VHARC-BXEpowersupply

Earthingwire

Controlcircuit

HARC-BXEuppermonitoring

equipment Nonpolar

HARC-BXEMonoblocairconditioning

Nonpolar

*“No.”indicatesthecableforthe"Wiringtype”.

Tab. 10

III. Installation of the PCB plates and the H-LINK terminals

There are 8 PCBs in each HARC-BX E that correspond to the unit's H-LINK terminals as shown in the following figure.

So that the PCBs can communicate and control the assigned units, they should be connected to the H-LINK corresponding to the circuit where the unit is.

AC100-240

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

LN

HARC-BXE

H-LINK

HITACHIBMSInterface

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Fig. 9

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

IV. DIP switch adjustment

The DIP switches are inside the central HARC-BX E control between the terminal board and the PCBs. The first column of DIP switches (S201) are used to programme the numbers of the outdoor units and indoor units, and the second column of DIP switches (S202) are used to programme the master and slave controls.

There are two group of 8 DIP switches, which relate to the PCBs, the first line of DIPs with the first PCB and so on.

NOTE


1. Configure the DIP switches before turning the power supply on.2. Remove the front board to the configure the DIP switches.3. Each board's DIP switch configuration is different.�. Set the 8 pin DIP switch (S201).

The first four pins of the 8 pin DIP switch (S201) are used to set the outdoor unit and the second four pins are used to set the indoor units controlled by the PCB.

The setting procedure for the outdoor unit number and indoor unit number can be seen in the following table.

8 pin DIP switch setting (S201)

Description

ON12345678

No. OU No. IU

The8pinDIPswitch(S201)settingisdeterminedbythenumbersoftheoutdoorunits(OU)andthenumbersofthecorrespondingindoorunits(IU)controlledbythePCB.

Tab. 11

The following table explains how to programme the outdoor unit numbers. Up to 1� numbers can be programmed:

OU No.

Pin settingOU No.

Pin settingOU No.

Pin settingOU No.

Pin setting

0 ON12345678 4 ON12345678 8 ON12345678 12 ON12345678

1 ON12345678 5 ON12345678 9 ON12345678 13 ON12345678

2 ON12345678 6 ON12345678 10 ON12345678 14 ON12345678

3 ON12345678 7 ON12345678 11 ON12345678 15 ON12345678

Tab. 12

The following table explains how to programme the numbers of the indoor units controlled for each board:

HARC-BX (A) HARC-BX (B)

Indoor units Pin setting Indoor units Pin setting

from0to7(8IU) ON12345678





from12to15(4IU) ON12345678

Tab. 13

Installation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

The position of the switch indicates the address of the first indoor unit for this group of 8 units in the case of the HARC-BX(A) or the first indoor unit for the group of 4 units in the case of the HARC-BX(B).Only the address indicated in the table above can be used for each group.

5. Set the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) The 8 pin DIP switch (S202) is used as follows:

Boardnotactivated

ON12345678

ActivatetheboardtocontrolagivennumberofindoorunitsbasedonS201

ON12345678

Boardactiveasslave

ON12345678

Boardactivemaster(onlyoneboardcanbeamasterboardoneachH-Linkline)

ON12345678

TestModefortheactivatedboard(seesection4.1.3.1forfurtherdetails)

ON12345678

V. DIP programming example:

The following diagram shows an example for connecting a HARC-BX(B) on an installation:

OU0 IU00 IU01 IU02

IU03 IU04 IU05

OU1

IU00

OU2(OU3)

IU00 IU01 IU02

IU03 IU04 IU05

IU06 IU07 IU08

IU09 IU10 IU11

IU12 IU13 IU14

IU15 IU00 IU01

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

LN

HARC-BX

OURefnº

IUAdd.

MasterSlave

NoUtilizaMaster

board

Slaveboards

H-Linkconnection

Fig. 10

Operation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4.1.3. Operation

4.1.3.1. Test mode

1. Check that all the “Wiring connection” and “DIP switch adjustment” procedures have been carried out. 2. Turn the power supply by following the procedure below:

-Pluginthemonoblocairconditioning.-PlugtheHARC-BXEin.

�. Check the HARC-BX E connection.

The7-segmentdisplaywillchange,asshowninthefollowingtable,whentheHARC-BXEhasbeenpluggedin.Checkthe7-segmentdisplay.

Step7-segment

displayStatus

1 - Off

2 88 End of system initialization

3 22 Checking the monobloc air conditioning, number of connected remote controls

4 00 Normal transmission between the HARC-BX E and the monobloc air conditioning.

Tab. 14

4. Check the number of identified Indoor Units. The number of Indoor Units identified by the HARC-BX E will be shown on the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW [M.CLR]) button on the HARC-BX E. With the 7-segment display indicating ”00”. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Indoor Units).

5. When the recognisable indoor units have been located, check the Indoor Unit system numbers and the unit numbers that the HARC-BX E has identified. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position. All the system and unit numbers of the recognisable Indoor Units will be shown in the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW[M.CLR] button on the HARC-BX E. If multiple Indoor Units are identified, the system and unit numbers for the identified Indoor Units will be shown sequentially every time the (PSW[CLR]) button is pressed. The system numbers will appear on the left-hand side of the 7-segment display and the unit numbers on the right-hand side. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Indoor Units).

PressM.CLR

PressM.CLR

PressM.CLR

PressM.CLR

NºU.E. NºU.I.

Fig. 11


ON12345678

Operation

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

7-segment display

Description7-segment

displayDescription

7-segment display

Description7-segment

displayDescription

0OUno.01orIU

no.01 OUno.05orIU

no.05 8OUno.09orIU

no.09 COUno.13orIU

no.13

OUno.02orIU

no.02 OUno.06orIU

no.06 OUno.10orIU

no.10 dOUno.14orIU

no.14

2OUno.03orIU

no.03 OUno.07orIU

no.07 AOUno.11orIU

no.11 eOUno.15orIU

no.15

OUno.04orIU

no.04 OUno.08orIU

no.08 OUno.12orIU

no.12 FOUno.16orIU

no.16

Tab. 15

�. Put pin no. 2 of the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position when all the checks are completed.

Thetestmodeiscomplete.


ON12345678

4.1.3.2. BMS connection

Take the following points into account for the correct connection of the BMS:

-Thecorrectelectricwiringasindicatedinprevioussections. -TheBMSprotocol ·TheBMSshouldupdateitshardwareviaLonWorksasshownpreviously. -BMSstartup: ·PresstheLON.SERVbutton:




Fig. 12

Whenthisbuttonispressed,theHARC-BXEsendsthe“NeuronChipID”identification. ·ThecommunicationstartsatthatmomentandtheBMScanreadandreceiveorders. ·BMStroubleshootingistheresponsibilityoftheBMSitself.

4.1.3.3. Indication of abnormal conditions

1. Abnormal conditions will be displayed on the 7-segment display of the HARC-BX E.

7-segment display Phenomenon Type of abnormal condition

Abnormal initial connection. No remote control has been found (connection fault).

Abnormal transmission on the remote control.

There has been no response 70 seconds after the attempted transmission to the remote control.

Abnormal transmission on the remote control.

There has been no response 180 seconds after the attempted transmission to the remote control.

Tab. 16


HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E


4.1.4.1. HARC-BX E self-check

The self-check, used to identify any abnormal conditions which may occur in the HARC-BX E, can be carried out with the following procedures:

1. Connect the power supply leaving the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position. “88appears on the 7-segment display and turns off).

ON123456788pinDSW(S202)

2. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON123456780 E

8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal

3. Put8pinDIPswitch(201)pinno.1intheOFFpositionandthenplaceonlypinno.2intheONposition.(ThisactionshouldbecarriedoutwhilstalsoconfiguringtheterminationresistanceoftheterminalontheH-Link).

7-segmentdisplay

ON12345678 20 2E


�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 2 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON123456780*

8pinDSW(S201)

*ThetotalnumberofpinsintheONpositionoutofpinnumbers1to5ofthe8pinDIPswitch(S202)willbeshownontheright-handsideofthedisplay,andanumber“3”willappearontheleft-handsideofthedisplay.

5. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. � in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON12345678- 88



HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

250TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4.1.4.2. Troubleshooting

The following table shows the possible troubleshooting actions to be carried out in the event of unit malfunction. Make sure that the power supply is disconnected before starting any check.

No. Phenomenon Check points Action

1

TheHARC-BXEdoesnotstartupalthoughthepowersupplyis

turnedon.(Noindicationinthe7-segmentdisplay).

Checkthattheelectricitycableisconnected. Connecttheelectricitycable.

Checkthatitsupplieselectricity.Measurethepowersupplyvoltage.Ifthevoltagemeasurementexceedsthenormalrangeof100~240±10%[V],thewiringsystemsandproceduresshouldbeinspectedandexamined.

Checkifthepowersupplyisturnedon(PWRsON).Ifthepilotlightisofftheremaybeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.

Checkwhetherthescrewsonthepowersupplyareloose. Tightenthem.

CheckiftheLED(PWRortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemswiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckifthemonoblocairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checktheuppertransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheuppertransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)isflashingatregularintervals(from1to2sec.).

Theflashingindicatesthattherecouldbeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.

2

TheHARC-BXEdoesnotidentifytheairconditioningeven

thoughthepowersupplyison.

(“”appearsonthe7-segmentdisplay).

Afterthe“00”indicationonthe

7-segmentscreenwithtestmode,theactualamountofairconditioningunits

doesnotmatchwiththeseaddresses.

CheckiftheHARC-BXE(OP)DIPswitchesarecorrectlyconfigured.

TheDIPswitchmustbeconfiguredagainaspersection4.1.4.1oftheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandoperationmanualonhowtoconfiguretheHARC-BXEDIPswitch.

Checkiftheairconditioningsystemandaddressarecorrectlyconfigured.

Theaddressshouldbeconfiguredagainasindicatedintheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanual.

Checkifthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.

Examinethecableconnection.

Checkifthetransmissioncablespecifiedbythemanufacturerhasbeenusedtoconnecttotheairconditioningunits.

Useashieldedcableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).

Checkifthetransmissioncableconnectedtotheairconditioningisconnectedtothepowersupplycable.

Leaveaminimumspaceof150mmbetweencables.

Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitiscorrectlyconfigured.

Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150Ω).

Checkifthetransmissioncircuitoperatesnormallywiththeself-checkfunction.

Theterminationresistanceshouldbeconfiguredinrelationtotheairconditioningtransmissioncable.

Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningshouldbeintheONposition.Checkifthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.


CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayisoff.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

3The7-segment

displayshows“”.


Useashieldedcableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).



Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsiscorrectlyconfigured.

Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150 Ω).



Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningunitshouldbesettotheONposition.

Tab. 17


HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

251TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

4.1.4.3. Periodic inspection

The unit should be periodically inspected with the aim of guaranteeing a reliable performance and long-lasting operation.

1. Ambient conditions: - Make sure that the internal temperature of the housing panel is not too high. - Make sure that the temperature of the unit housing is not too high. - Check if there is any dust or fine metal powder and, if so, remove it. Check the lubrication.

2. Displays: - Check if the run indicator LED of the power supply (PWR) is on. - Check that the run indicator for the transmission display (H-L, LON) indicates ON/OFF. - Check if the 7-segment display shows digits other than “00”.

�. Assembly and connection parts: - Check that the screws for the assembly, power supply, transmission cable and all other screws are correctly tightened.

$ WARNING

Do�not�use�acidic�cleaning�agents,�such�as�solvents,�to�clean�the�units.�They�could�remove�the�colour�from�the�coating�surfaces�and�melt�the�plastic�box.

HARC-BX E

Technical catalogue

252TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-BX E

Table of contents

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.2. HARC-70CE1.........................................................................................255

4.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................255


4.2.2. Installation..............................................................................................262


4.2.3. Operation................................................................................................265

4.2.3.1.Checkmode.......................................................................................................2654.2.3.2.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................265


4.2.4.1.HARC-70CE1(OP)self-check.........................................................................2664.2.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2674.2.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................268

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

255TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2. HARC-70CE1



I. General features

- The different systems within buildings such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, ..., can be fully controlled by just one BMS.

- Gateway interface with BMS LonWorks® systems (installations with intelligent control or BMS).

- With the HARC-70CE1 connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and 7 monitoring points of up to � chillers.

- With the HARC-70CE1 OP connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and up to �� monitoring points of one chiller unit.


This remote control can be connected to the following water chiller units:

Series-G2 Series-G1 Series-GRCUE-40AG2 RHUE-40AG2 RCUE-40WG2 RCUE-40AG1 RCUE-40AG RHUE-40AG RCUE-40WG RCUE-40CLG







RCUE-140AG2 RHUE-140AG2 RCUE-140AG1 RCUE-140AG

RCUE-150WG2 RCUE-150AG1 RCUE-150AG RCUE-150WG







RCUE-320AG2*




Tab. 1* These units can only be connected to HARC-70CE1, and are not compatible with the HARC-70CE1 OP version.


The HARC-70CE1 (OP) remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status.

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2.1.3. System configuration

The following figure shows the internal configuration of the BMS connection used by the HARC-70CE1.This manual describes the HARC-70CE1 in terms of the rest of equipment necessary to assemble the system, see the enclosed installation manual.

Monitoringequipment

LonWorks

HARC-70CE1

Chillerunit2

Chillerunit3

Chillerunit4

Chillerunit1

Monitoringequipment

HARC-70CE1OP

Chillerunit1

LonWorks

* LonWorks® is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the USA and other countries

Fig. 1

$ CAUTION

Make sure that the shielded cable is earthed.

I. Control panel components




Fig. 2

Power supply terminal: AC220~2�0V grid connection.

Earth terminal: HARC-70CE1 terminal earth connection.

PSW (Push Switch) No. 1 (M.CLR): Press the button to check the quantity of connected units.

7-segment display (1*): This indicates the current HARC-70CE1 status.

¥ PSW No. 2 (LON-SERV): Press the button (PSW) to transmit the Neuron ID. (Service pin).

¦ 8P DSW (DIP Switch) No. 1 (S201) (2*): Setting the system of HARC-70CE1 DIP switches.

§ 8P DSW No. 2 (S202) (�*): DIP switch (DSW) for setting the functions of the HARC-70CE1.

¨ Terminals to connect the LonWorks transmission line.

© Terminals to connect water chiller units.

(1*) 7-segment display: Read the “Check mode” and “Indication of abnormal conditions” sections for details on the 7-segment display.(2*) 8P DSW No. 1 S201: Read the “DIP switch setting” section for further information and for HARC-70CE1 functions.(3*) 8P DSW No. 2.S202: Read the “DIP switch adjustment” section. 8P DSW No. 1 and No. 2 are used for the self-check. For further

details, refer to the “HARC-70CE1 self-check” section.

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

257TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

II. HARC-70CE1 (OP) Specifications

■ Hardware specifications


Powersupply AC240V±10%(50/60Hz)

Energyconsumption 10W(max.)

Externaldimensions Width:170mm,height:75mm,depth:80mm(Installedinsidethebox)

Weight 0.6kg

Installationconditions Indoor

Temperatureconditions 0~45°C

Humidityconditions 10~80%(Nodew)

Tab. 2

■ Telecommunications specifications for water chillers


Communicationunit Waterchillers

Communicationscable Nonpolar,twistedandshielded2cablesystem

Telecommunicationssystem Half-duplextelecommunications

Synchronoussystem Asynchronouscommunicationsystem


Cablelength 1,000m(totallength)

ConnectionquantityHARC-70CE1type:Maximumof4chilleraddressesHARC-70CE1OPtype:Maximumof1chilleraddress

Tab. 3

■ Telecommunication specifications for the upper system


Communicationunit Uppermonitoringequipment

Transmissionprotocol LonTalk(*)protocol

Accessmethod PersistentCSMA/CDsystemplanned

Codingsystem DifferentialManchesterCode


Maximumcablelength 500m(totalbuslength)

(*) “LonTalk” is an “Echelon Corporation” trademark in the USA and other countries.

Tab. 4

III. Communication with LonWorks interface

We have two options for water chillers: · HARC-70CE1 · HARC-70CE1 OP

▲ HARC-70CE1TheHARC-70CE1isaLonWorksinterfacedesignedforcaseswhereonlythecontroloftheunitsisrequiredandthereisnoneedforunitoperationmonitoring.

Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolofupto4waterchilleraddresses

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

258TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

a.HARC-70CE1communicationmode:

Theinterfacecancontrolandmonitorthefollowingvariablesofeachconnectedchiller:

VariablesNetworkvesion1.0A

nviChillerEnable_n

nviCoolSetpt_n

nviMode_n

nviHeatSetpt_n

nvoOnOff_n

11Points/Unit



Remote

controlMonitor

x4

nvoActiveSetpt_n

nvoActualCapacity_n*1

nvoLvgCHWT_n*2

nvoEntCHWT_n*3

nvoAlarmDescr_n

nvoChillerStat_n

Fig. 3

b.XIFfilevariables:

Chiller number

Water-cooled

Air-cooled

Air heat pump

SVNTr Chiller



0 O O O nv0 nviChillerEnable_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUNLeaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.

0 O O O nv1 nviCoolSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting

2Bytes:-2000~2500=-20~25ºC

0 O O O nv2 nviMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting

1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)

0 - - O nv3 nviHeatSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting

2bytes:3000~6000=30~60ºC

0 O O O nv4 nvoOnOff_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffStateByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUN

Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.

0 O O O nv5 nvoActiveSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 - - - nv6 nvoActualCapa_0SNVT_lev_percent(NotAvailable)

81

Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)

Notenabled

0 O O O nv7 nvoLvgCHWTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature

2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 O O O nv8 nvoEntCHWTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature

2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 O O O nv9 nvoAlarmDescr_0 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode

31Bytes:Thefirst4bytesofthealarmdescriptionastheyareexplainedonthechillers.Byte5alwaysat0.Therestareindefinite

0 O O O nv10 nvoChillerStat_0 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus

3bytes:Byte1:ChillerRunMode

0:Chlr_Off(OFFMode)2:Chlr_Run(Runmode)

Byte2:ChillerOperationMode1:HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3:HVAC_COOL(Cooling)A:HVAC_FREE_COOL

(Coolingthermostatoff)Byte3:ChlrState

bit0:0/1(noalarm/alarm)bit1:0/1(startnotavailable/

startavailable)bit2:0/1(central/local)bits3~7:Notenabled

0 - - - nv11 untest_0SNVT_press(Notenabled)

30 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled0 - - - nv12 untest_10 - - - nv13 untest_20 - - - nv14 untest_3

5 HARC-70CE1 XIF file variables list (continued on the next page)

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1


1 O O O nv15 nviChlrEnable_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/Offorder Sameasnv0

Leaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.


Sameasnv1


Sameasnv2


Sameasnv3

1 O O O nv19 nvoOnOff_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffState Sameasnv4 Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.

1 O O O nv20 nvoActiveSetpt_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting Sameasnv5

1 - - - nv21 nvoActualCapa_1SNVT_lev_percent(Notenabled)

81


Notenabled


Sameasnv7


Sameasnv8

1 O O O nv24 nvoAlarmDescr_1 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode Sameasnv9

1 O O O nv25 nvoChillerStat_1 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus Sameasnv10


30 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled1 - - - nv27 untest_51 - - - nv28 untest_61 - - - nv29 untest_72 O O O nv30 nviChlrEnable_2 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrder Sameasnv0



Sameasnv1


Sameasnv2


Sameasnv3




81


Notenabled


Sameasnv7


Sameasnv8




30

Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled2 - - - nv42 untest_9 302 - - - nv43 untest_10 302 - - - nv44 untest_11 303 O O O nv45 nviChlrEnable_3 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrder Sameasnv0



Sameasnv1


Sameasnv2


Sameasnv3




81


Notenabled


Sameasnv7


Sameasnv8




30

Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled3 - - - nv57 untest_13 303 - - - nv58 untest_14 303 - - - nv59 untest_15 30

nv60 nciMaxSendTimenv61 nciMinSendTime

Tab. 5 HARC-70CE1 XIF file variables list

■ HARC-70CE1 OPTheHARC-70CE1OPisaLonWorksinterfacedesignedforcasesthatrequireamoredetailedcontroloftheunits,inadditiontocompleteunitoperationmonitoringfunctions.

Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolof1waterchilleraddress

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

Whenthechillerusestwoaddresses,thesecondaddresscannotbecontrolled.Therefore,theuseoftheSTDinterfaceisrecommendedforsuchcases.a.HARC-70CE1OPcommunicationmode: Theinterfacecancontrolandmonitorthefollowingvariablesofeachconnectedchiller:

Networkvariablesversion1.0B

nviChillerEnable_n

nviCoolSetpt_n

nviMode_n

nviHeatSetpt_n

nvoOnOff_n

nvoChillerStat_n18Points/cycle



Remote

control Monitor

x6

nvoActiveSetpt_n

nvoActualCapacity_n

nvoLvgCHWT_nnvoEntCHWT_n

nvoAlarmDescr_n

nvoAmbientTemp

nvoLvgCHWT_n

nvoDtemp_nnvoStemp_n

nvoCompStat_nnvoDPress_nnvoSpress_n

Fig. 4

b.XIFfilevariables:

Chiller number

Water-cooled

Air-cooled

Air heat

pump

SVNTr Chiller



0 O O O nv0 nviChillerEnable_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUNLeaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.

0 O O O nv1 nviCoolSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting

2Bytes:-2000~2500=-20~25ºC

0 O O O nv2 nviMode SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting

1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)

0 - - O nv3 nviHeatSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting

2bytes:3000~6000=30~60ºC

0 O O O nv4 nvoOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OffStateByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP

State1=RUN


0 O O O nv5 nvoActiveSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 - - - nv6 nvoActualCapaSNVT_lev_percent(NotAvailable)

81Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)

Notenabled

0 O O O nv7 nvoLvgCHWTemp SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature

2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 O O O nv8 nvoEntCHWTemp SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature

2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC

0 O O O nv9 nvoAlarmDescr SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode

31Bytes:Thefirst4bytesofthealarmdescriptionastheyareexplainedonthechillers.Byte5alwaysat0.Therestareindefinite

0 O O O nv10 nvoChillerStat SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus

3bytes:Byte1:ChillerRunMode

0:Chlr_Off(OFFMode)2:Chlr_Run(Runmode)

Byte2:ChillerOperationMode1:HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3:HVAC_COOL(Cooling)A:HVAC_FREE_COOL

(Coolingthermostatoff)Byte3:ChlrState

bit0:0/1(noalarm/alarm)bit1:0/1(startnotavailable/

startavailable)bit2:0/1(central/local)bits3~7:Notenabled

0 n11 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure1 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa


0 n13 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure3 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa0 n14 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure4 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa

6 HARC-70CE1 XIF OP file variables list (continued on the next page)

General details

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1





0 n17 nvoSpress1 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure1 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa






0 n23 nvoDtemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature1

2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC

0 n29 nvoSTemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature12Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC






0 n35 nvoODtemp SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperature2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC

0 n36 nvoCompOnOff1 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation

32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN











0 n42 nvoLvgCHWTemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105Wateroutlettemperature1

2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC

0 n45 nvoLvgCHWTemp4 SNVT_temp_p 105Watertemperatureattherearofthechiller1

2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC


2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC

0 n48 unused1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled









nv57 nciMaxSendTime

nv58 nciMinSendTime

Tab. 6 HARC-70CE1 OP XIF file variables list

Installation

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2.2. Installation



- Install the HARC in an earthed metal box.- Install a differential circuit-breaker for protection against short circuits on the power supply of the HARC.

$ CAUTION

- If a transmission fault occurs between the HARC and the chiller unit, the chiller will stop. If it is set to manual start, turn the power supply to the chiller off and then on again. Otherwise, the chiller unit will continue to show the transmission alarm and will not be able to start.

- To start the chiller unit up when it has been turned off, send an off order then an on order from the remote control.- Do not define the temperature setting of the chiller, controlled by the HARC, from the control panel. If it is carried

out this way, the temperature is modified and the change is sent to the remote control.- If there is a power failure in the chiller, controlled by the HARC, it may be impossible to recover the conditions that

existed before the fault.- After a power failure, transmit a start up order from the remote control after restoring the power. After a power

failure, transmit a start up order from the remote control after restoring the power.- When transmitting a SNVT from the HARC used by other control devices, a period of two minutes must pass

between the transmission and the chiller reaction.- Do not disconnect the power supply while a SCPT is being used. Even when the maximum sending time has

been exceeded, without having transmitted a SNVT from the HARC with a lower minimum sending value, a SCPT should be transmitted again. Otherwise, the SCPT value remain at “0”.

- If the remote control panel state is changed to local and then to remote again, the temperature setting and control mode should be defined again. Otherwise, the temperature and mode will remain at the chiller's initial values.

- If an abnormal transmission occurs between the control and the HARC, the conditions of the two units may not match. Set the maximum sending time and ensure that the conditions of the control and the HARC are both within said interval.


NOTE

- Bear in mind the safety summary warnings when selecting the installation site.- The installation site should be located in a place with an earthing connection.

▲Spacerequiredfortheinstallation

20 20

5050

Lessthan10

900

Fig. 5

Installation

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1


1. Install the HARC-70CE1 in an earthed metal box, bearing in mind the following HARC-70CE1 dimensions for the box that it will be installed in.

POW

IRP PACCONTROLSYSTEMG/W

170

162

72 807

75

8IdentificationnumberNEURONCHIPatthebackofthecover

Terminalscover

AfteropeningAfteropening

UP

DOWN

Fig. 6

2. Secure the HARC-70CE1 in accordance with the following instructions, depending on if it is mounted with screws or DIN rails.

Screw mounting DIN rail mounting

170 4

4162

72 (87)2-M4

(170)

40(8

7)

CentralrailDINline

Fig. 7


$ CAUTION

- All wiring work must be done in accordance with local regulations and the instructions of the electricity company.- A qualified electrician should carry out the electrical wiring.- Adjust the electrical leakage detector switch in accordance with local regulations.

Installation

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

I. Type of wiring

1. The HARC-70CE1 should be installed between the power supply, the monitoring equipment, the water chiller and the earthing connection.

2. Wiring methodAC220/240VPowersource

Monitoringequipment

HARC-70CE1

Waterchiller Waterchiller

Fig. 8

No. Connection equipment Wiring specifications

AC220/240Vpowersupplywiring(fieldsupply) 2mm2shielded

Chillersignalcableconnectionwiring,5Vdc(fieldsupply)

0.75mm2Twisted,shieldedpaircablewithamaximumlengthof1000m

Earthingwire(fieldsupply) -

ConnectionwiringbetweentheLonWorkssignalwires,5Vdc(fieldsupply)

-

Tab. 7

II. Electrical wiring connection

1. Turn off the main electric switch connected to the cable of the HARC-70CE1 in order to connect the cable.

2. Wire in accordance with the following table.

Section Wiring method Comments

Electricpowerline

HARC-70CE1220/240Vpower

supply

AC AC E

Earthingwire

AC AC E

Controlcircuit

HARC-70CE1uppermonitoring

equipment


Nonpolar

HARC-70CE1Chillers


Nonpolar

Tab. 8

Operation

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2.3. Operation

4.2.3.1. Check mode

1. Check that all the “Wiring connection” and “DIP switch adjustment” procedures have been carried out.

2. Turn the power supply by following the procedure below:-Powerupthechillerunits.-ThenplugtheHARC-70CE1(OP)in.

�. Check the connection of the HARC-70CE1 (OP).

OncetheHARC-70CE1(OP)hasbeenpluggedinthe7-segmentdisplaywillchange,asshowninthefollowingtable.Checkthe7-segmentdisplay.

Step7-segment

displayStatus

1 -- Off.

2 88 End of system initialisation.

3 22Checking the monobloc air conditioning, number of connected remote control combiners.

4 00 Normal transmission between the HARC-70CE1 (OP) and the water chiller.

Tab. 9

4. Check the number of identified Chiller Units.

The number of identified Chiller Units for the HARC-70CE1 (OP) will be displayed on the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW [M.CLR]) button on the HARC-70CE1 (OP).

The 7-segment display will indicate ”00”. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Chiller Units).

4.2.3.2. Indication of abnormal conditions

1. Abnormal conditions will be displayed on the 7-segment display of the HARC-70CE1.

7-segment display Phenomenon Type of abnormal condition

Abnormalinitialconnection.Noremotecontrollercombinerhasbeenfound(connectionfault).

Abnormaltransmissionontheremotecontrolcombiner.

Therehasbeennoresponse70secondsaftertheremotecontrolattemptedtotransmittothecombiner.

Abnormaltransmissionontheremotecontrolcombiner.

Therehasbeennoresponse180secondsaftertheremotecontrolattemptedtotransmittothecombiner.

Tab. 10


HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1


4.2.4.1. HARC-70CE 1 (OP) self-check

The self-check, used to identify any abnormal conditions which may occur in the HARC-70CE1 (OP), can be carried out with the following procedures:

1. Connect the power supply leaving the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position.“88” appears on the 7-segment display and turns off).

ON123456788pinDSW(S202)

2. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON123456780 E


�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. 2 in the ON position. (This action should be carried out whilst also configuring the termination resistance of the terminal on the H-Link).

7-segmentdisplay

ON1234567820 2E


�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 2 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON123456780*

8pinDSW(S201)

*ThetotalnumberofpinsintheONpositionoutofpinnumbers1to5ofthe8pinDIPswitch(S202)willbeshownontheright-handsideofthedisplay,andanumber“3”willappearontheleft-handsideofthedisplay.

5. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. � in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.

7-segmentdisplay

ON12345678- 88



HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2.4.2. Troubleshooting

The following table shows the possible troubleshooting actions to be carried out in the event of unit malfunction. Make sure that the power supply is disconnected before starting any check.

No. Phenomenon Check points Action

1

TheHARC-70CE1(OP)doesnotstart

upalthoughthepowersupplyisturnedon.(Noindicationinthe7-segmentdisplay).

Checkthattheelectricitycableisconnected. Connecttheelectricitycable.

Checkthatitsupplieselectricity.Measurethepowersupplyvoltage.Ifthevoltagemeasurementexceedsthenormalrangeof100~240±10%[V],thewiringsystemsandproceduresshouldbeinspectedandexamined.

Checkifthepowersupplyisturnedon(PWRsON).Ifthepilotlightisofftheremaybeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.

Checkwhetherthescrewsonthepowersupplyareloose. Tightenthem.

CheckiftheLED(PWRortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemswiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckifthemonoblocairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checktheuppertransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheuppertransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)isflashingatregularintervals(from1to2sec.).

Theflashingindicatesthattherecouldbeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre

2

TheHARC-70CE1(OP)

doesnotidentifytheairconditioningeven

thoughthepowersupplyison.(“”appearsonthe7-segmentdisplay).

Afterthe“00”indicationonthe

7-segmentscreenwithtestmode,theactualamountofairconditioningunits

doesnotmatchwiththeseaddresses.

CheckiftheHARC-70CE1(OP)DIPswitchesarecorrectlyconfigured.

TheDIPswitchmustbeconfiguredagainaspersection4.2.4.1oftheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanualonhowtoconfiguretheHARC-70CE1(OP)DIPswitch.

Checkiftheairconditioningsystemandaddressarecorrectlyconfigured.

Theaddressshouldbeconfiguredagainasindicatedintheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanual.

Checkifthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.



Useashieldedpaircableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).



Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitiscorrectlyconfigured.

Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150Ω).



Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningshouldbeintheONposition.Checkifthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.


CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayison.Checktheairconditioning'stransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.

CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayisoff.Checktheairconditioning'stransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally

3The7-segment

displayshows“”.


Useashieldedpaircableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).



Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsiscorrectlyconfigured.

Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150▲).



Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningunitshouldbesettotheONposition.

Tab. 11

HARC-70CE1

Technical catalogue

2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

HARC-70CE1

4.2.4.3. Periodic inspection

The unit should be periodically inspected with the aim of guaranteeing a reliable performance and long-lasting operation.

1. Ambient conditions: - Make sure that the internal temperature of the housing panel is not too high. - Make sure that the temperature of the unit housing is not too high. - Check if there is any dust or fine metal powder and, if so, remove it. Check the lubrication. 2. Displays: - Check if the run indicator LED of the power supply (PWR) is on. - Check that the run indicator for the transmission display (H-L, LON) indicates ON/OFF. - Check if the 7-segment display shows digits other than “00”.

�. Assembly and connection parts: - Check that the screws for the assembly, power supply, transmission cable and all other screws are correctly tightened.

$ WARNING

Do�not�use�acidic�cleaning�agents,�such�as�solvents,�to�clean�the�units.�They�could�remove�the�colour�from�the�coating�surfaces�and�melt�the�plastic�box.


CSC-5S

Catálogo técnico

Printed in España.TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008

Hitachi Air Conditioning Products (M) Sdn. Lot No. 10, Jalan Kemajan Banji Industrial Estate

��50 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Certification ISO 9001, Malaysia

Hitachi Appliances, Inc. Shimizu-shi, Shizuoka-ken, Japan ISO 9001Certified by JQA, Japan

ISO 14001 Certified by JQA, Japan

Hitachi Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A. Ronda Shimizu, 1-Políg. Ind. Can Torrella

082�� Vacarisses (Barcelona) España ISO 9001 Certified by AENOR, Spain

Hitachi is participating in the EUROVENT Certification Programme.

Products are as specified in the EUROVENT Directory of Certified.

utopia controls

Documents